xref: /openbmc/linux/include/net/mac80211.h (revision 6f0c460f)
1 /* SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0-only */
2 /*
3  * mac80211 <-> driver interface
4  *
5  * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
6  * Copyright 2006-2007	Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
7  * Copyright 2007-2010	Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
8  * Copyright 2013-2014  Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
9  * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2017 Intel Deutschland GmbH
10  * Copyright (C) 2018 - 2022 Intel Corporation
11  */
12 
13 #ifndef MAC80211_H
14 #define MAC80211_H
15 
16 #include <linux/bug.h>
17 #include <linux/kernel.h>
18 #include <linux/if_ether.h>
19 #include <linux/skbuff.h>
20 #include <linux/ieee80211.h>
21 #include <net/cfg80211.h>
22 #include <net/codel.h>
23 #include <net/ieee80211_radiotap.h>
24 #include <asm/unaligned.h>
25 
26 /**
27  * DOC: Introduction
28  *
29  * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
30  * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
31  * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
32  * drivers.
33  */
34 
35 /**
36  * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
37  *
38  * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
39  * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
40  * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
41  * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
42  * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
43  * tasklet function.
44  *
45  * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
46  *	 use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
47  */
48 
49 /**
50  * DOC: Warning
51  *
52  * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
53  * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
54  */
55 
56 /**
57  * DOC: Frame format
58  *
59  * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
60  * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
61  * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
62  * hardware.
63  *
64  * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
65  *
66  * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
67  * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
68  *
69  * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
70  * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
71  */
72 
73 /**
74  * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
75  *
76  * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
77  * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
78  * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
79  * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
80  *
81  * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
82  * suspend.
83  *
84  * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
85  *
86  */
87 
88 /**
89  * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing
90  *
91  * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed
92  * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness
93  * between different stations/interfaces.
94  * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead
95  * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx().
96  * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx().
97  *
98  * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue
99  * driver operation.
100  *
101  * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with
102  * another per-sta for non-data/non-mgmt and bufferable management frames, and
103  * a single per-vif queue for multicast data frames.
104  *
105  * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations
106  * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops.
107  *
108  * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame from a
109  * txq, it calls ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a
110  * queue, it calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op.
111  *
112  * Drivers can optionally delegate responsibility for scheduling queues to
113  * mac80211, to take advantage of airtime fairness accounting. In this case, to
114  * obtain the next queue to pull frames from, the driver calls
115  * ieee80211_next_txq(). The driver is then expected to return the txq using
116  * ieee80211_return_txq().
117  *
118  * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has
119  * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling
120  * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq
121  * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls
122  * .release_buffered_frames().
123  * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own
124  * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained
125  * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue).
126  */
127 
128 struct device;
129 
130 /**
131  * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
132  *
133  * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
134  * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
135  */
136 enum ieee80211_max_queues {
137 	IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES =		16,
138 	IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP =	BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
139 };
140 
141 #define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE	0xff
142 
143 /**
144  * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
145  * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
146  * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
147  * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
148  * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
149  */
150 enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
151 	IEEE80211_AC_VO		= 0,
152 	IEEE80211_AC_VI		= 1,
153 	IEEE80211_AC_BE		= 2,
154 	IEEE80211_AC_BK		= 3,
155 };
156 
157 /**
158  * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
159  *
160  * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
161  * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
162  *
163  * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
164  * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
165  *	2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
166  * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
167  * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
168  * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
169  * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
170  * @mu_edca: is the MU EDCA configured
171  * @mu_edca_param_rec: MU EDCA Parameter Record for HE
172  */
173 struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
174 	u16 txop;
175 	u16 cw_min;
176 	u16 cw_max;
177 	u8 aifs;
178 	bool acm;
179 	bool uapsd;
180 	bool mu_edca;
181 	struct ieee80211_he_mu_edca_param_ac_rec mu_edca_param_rec;
182 };
183 
184 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
185 	unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
186 	unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
187 	unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
188 	unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
189 };
190 
191 /**
192  * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
193  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
194  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
195  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
196  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
197  *	this is used only with channel switching with CSA
198  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
199  */
200 enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
201 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH		= BIT(0),
202 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS	= BIT(1),
203 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR		= BIT(2),
204 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL	= BIT(3),
205 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH	= BIT(4),
206 };
207 
208 /**
209  * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
210  *
211  * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
212  * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
213  *
214  * @def: the channel definition
215  * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
216  * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
217  *	active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
218  * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
219  *	after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
220  *	this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
221  * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
222  * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
223  *	sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
224  */
225 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
226 	struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
227 	struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
228 
229 	u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
230 
231 	bool radar_enabled;
232 
233 	u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
234 };
235 
236 /**
237  * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
238  * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
239  *	exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
240  *	needs to be switched from one to the other.
241  * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
242  *      to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
243  *      will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
244  *      from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
245  *      implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
246  *      hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
247  *      will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
248  *      for changes/removal.)
249  */
250 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
251 	CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
252 	CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
253 };
254 
255 /**
256  * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
257  *
258  * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
259  * needs to switch from one chanctx to another.  The
260  * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
261  * done.
262  *
263  * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
264  * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
265  * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
266  */
267 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
268 	struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
269 	struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
270 	struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
271 };
272 
273 /**
274  * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
275  *
276  * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
277  * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
278  *
279  * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
280  *	also implies a change in the AID.
281  * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
282  * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
283  * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
284  * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
285  * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
286  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
287  * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
288  *	reason (IBSS and managed mode)
289  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
290  *	new beacon (beaconing modes)
291  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
292  *	enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
293  * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
294  * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
295  * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
296  * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
297  *	that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
298  * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
299  * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
300  * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
301  * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
302  * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
303  * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
304  *	changed
305  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
306  *	currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
307  * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
308  *	note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
309  *	context had been assigned.
310  * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
311  * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed
312  * @BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE: keep alive options (idle period or protected
313  *	keep alive) changed.
314  * @BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE: Multicast Rate setting changed for this interface
315  * @BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER: fine timing measurement request responder
316  *	functionality changed for this BSS (AP mode).
317  * @BSS_CHANGED_TWT: TWT status changed
318  * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD: OBSS Packet Detection status changed.
319  * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR: BSS Color has changed
320  * @BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY: FILS discovery status changed.
321  * @BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP: Unsolicited broadcast probe response
322  *	status changed.
323  *
324  */
325 enum ieee80211_bss_change {
326 	BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC		= 1<<0,
327 	BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT	= 1<<1,
328 	BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE	= 1<<2,
329 	BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT		= 1<<3,
330 	BSS_CHANGED_HT			= 1<<4,
331 	BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES		= 1<<5,
332 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT		= 1<<6,
333 	BSS_CHANGED_BSSID		= 1<<7,
334 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON		= 1<<8,
335 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED	= 1<<9,
336 	BSS_CHANGED_CQM			= 1<<10,
337 	BSS_CHANGED_IBSS		= 1<<11,
338 	BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER		= 1<<12,
339 	BSS_CHANGED_QOS			= 1<<13,
340 	BSS_CHANGED_IDLE		= 1<<14,
341 	BSS_CHANGED_SSID		= 1<<15,
342 	BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP	= 1<<16,
343 	BSS_CHANGED_PS			= 1<<17,
344 	BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER		= 1<<18,
345 	BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS		= 1<<19,
346 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO		= 1<<20,
347 	BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH		= 1<<21,
348 	BSS_CHANGED_OCB                 = 1<<22,
349 	BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS		= 1<<23,
350 	BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE		= 1<<24,
351 	BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE		= 1<<25,
352 	BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER	= 1<<26,
353 	BSS_CHANGED_TWT			= 1<<27,
354 	BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD		= 1<<28,
355 	BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR	= 1<<29,
356 	BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY      = 1<<30,
357 	BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP = 1<<31,
358 
359 	/* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
360 };
361 
362 /*
363  * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
364  * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
365  * filtering will be disabled.
366  */
367 #define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
368 
369 /**
370  * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver
371  * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver.
372  * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME
373  * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received
374  * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because
375  *	they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only
376  *	once each time the timeout triggers.
377  */
378 enum ieee80211_event_type {
379 	RSSI_EVENT,
380 	MLME_EVENT,
381 	BAR_RX_EVENT,
382 	BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT,
383 };
384 
385 /**
386  * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT
387  * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver.
388  * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver.
389  */
390 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data {
391 	RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
392 	RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
393 };
394 
395 /**
396  * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT
397  * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data
398  */
399 struct ieee80211_rssi_event {
400 	enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data;
401 };
402 
403 /**
404  * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
405  * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication
406  * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association
407  * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received..
408  * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent.
409  */
410 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data {
411 	AUTH_EVENT,
412 	ASSOC_EVENT,
413 	DEAUTH_RX_EVENT,
414 	DEAUTH_TX_EVENT,
415 };
416 
417 /**
418  * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
419  * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully.
420  * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer.
421  * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out.
422  */
423 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status {
424 	MLME_SUCCESS,
425 	MLME_DENIED,
426 	MLME_TIMEOUT,
427 };
428 
429 /**
430  * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT
431  * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data
432  * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status
433  * @reason: the reason code if applicable
434  */
435 struct ieee80211_mlme_event {
436 	enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data;
437 	enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status;
438 	u16 reason;
439 };
440 
441 /**
442  * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events
443  * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates
444  * @tid: the tid
445  * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT)
446  */
447 struct ieee80211_ba_event {
448 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
449 	u16 tid;
450 	u16 ssn;
451 };
452 
453 /**
454  * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver
455  * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type.
456  * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT
457  * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT
458  * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT
459  * @u:union holding the fields above
460  */
461 struct ieee80211_event {
462 	enum ieee80211_event_type type;
463 	union {
464 		struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi;
465 		struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme;
466 		struct ieee80211_ba_event ba;
467 	} u;
468 };
469 
470 /**
471  * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data
472  *
473  * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO
474  *
475  * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
476  * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
477  */
478 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data {
479 	u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN];
480 	u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN];
481 };
482 
483 /**
484  * struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params - FTM responder parameters
485  *
486  * @lci: LCI subelement content
487  * @civicloc: CIVIC location subelement content
488  * @lci_len: LCI data length
489  * @civicloc_len: Civic data length
490  */
491 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params {
492 	const u8 *lci;
493 	const u8 *civicloc;
494 	size_t lci_len;
495 	size_t civicloc_len;
496 };
497 
498 /**
499  * struct ieee80211_fils_discovery - FILS discovery parameters from
500  * IEEE Std 802.11ai-2016, Annex C.3 MIB detail.
501  *
502  * @min_interval: Minimum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000)
503  * @max_interval: Maximum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000)
504  */
505 struct ieee80211_fils_discovery {
506 	u32 min_interval;
507 	u32 max_interval;
508 };
509 
510 /**
511  * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
512  *
513  * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
514  * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
515  *
516  * @htc_trig_based_pkt_ext: default PE in 4us units, if BSS supports HE
517  * @uora_exists: is the UORA element advertised by AP
518  * @ack_enabled: indicates support to receive a multi-TID that solicits either
519  *	ACK, BACK or both
520  * @uora_ocw_range: UORA element's OCW Range field
521  * @frame_time_rts_th: HE duration RTS threshold, in units of 32us
522  * @he_support: does this BSS support HE
523  * @twt_requester: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
524  *	mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
525  * @twt_responder: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
526  *	mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
527  * @twt_protected: does this BSS support protected TWT frames
528  * @twt_broadcast: does this BSS support broadcast TWT
529  * @assoc: association status
530  * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
531  *	or not
532  * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
533  * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
534  * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
535  * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble
536  * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP)
537  * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
538  *	valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
539  *	with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
540  * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
541  *	as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
542  *	HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
543  *	only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
544  *	association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
545  *	%BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
546  * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
547  *	the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
548  *	(see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
549  * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
550  *	is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
551  *	IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync
552  *	by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently
553  *	guaranteed only in certain callbacks.
554  * @beacon_int: beacon interval
555  * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
556  * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
557  *	index into the rate table configured by the driver in
558  *	the current band.
559  * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
560  * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
561  * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
562  * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
563  * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
564  *	configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
565  * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data
566  * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
567  *	This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel.
568  *	Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must
569  *	be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT.
570  * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
571  *	implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should
572  *	cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in
573  *	relation to the newly configured threshold.
574  * @cqm_rssi_low: Connection quality monitor RSSI lower threshold, a zero value
575  *	implies disabled.  This is an alternative mechanism to the single
576  *	threshold event and can't be enabled simultaneously with it.
577  * @cqm_rssi_high: Connection quality monitor RSSI upper threshold.
578  * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
579  * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
580  *	may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
581  *	The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
582  *	to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
583  * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
584  *	may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
585  *	array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
586  * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
587  * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
588  *	hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
589  *	your driver/device needs to do.
590  * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
591  *	offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
592  * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
593  * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
594  * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
595  * @txpower: TX power in dBm.  INT_MIN means not configured.
596  * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit
597  *	Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular
598  *	TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is
599  *	NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from
600  *	userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to
601  *	NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace)
602  * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
603  * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed
604  *	to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS
605  *	if it has associated clients without P2P PS support.
606  * @max_idle_period: the time period during which the station can refrain from
607  *	transmitting frames to its associated AP without being disassociated.
608  *	In units of 1000 TUs. Zero value indicates that the AP did not include
609  *	a (valid) BSS Max Idle Period Element.
610  * @protected_keep_alive: if set, indicates that the station should send an RSN
611  *	protected frame to the AP to reset the idle timer at the AP for the
612  *	station.
613  * @ftm_responder: whether to enable or disable fine timing measurement FTM
614  *	responder functionality.
615  * @ftmr_params: configurable lci/civic parameter when enabling FTM responder.
616  * @nontransmitted: this BSS is a nontransmitted BSS profile
617  * @transmitter_bssid: the address of transmitter AP
618  * @bssid_index: index inside the multiple BSSID set
619  * @bssid_indicator: 2^bssid_indicator is the maximum number of APs in set
620  * @ema_ap: AP supports enhancements of discovery and advertisement of
621  *	nontransmitted BSSIDs
622  * @profile_periodicity: the least number of beacon frames need to be received
623  *	in order to discover all the nontransmitted BSSIDs in the set.
624  * @he_oper: HE operation information of the BSS (AP/Mesh) or of the AP we are
625  *	connected to (STA)
626  * @he_obss_pd: OBSS Packet Detection parameters.
627  * @he_bss_color: BSS coloring settings, if BSS supports HE
628  * @fils_discovery: FILS discovery configuration
629  * @unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval: Unsolicited broadcast probe response
630  *	interval.
631  * @s1g: BSS is S1G BSS (affects Association Request format).
632  * @beacon_tx_rate: The configured beacon transmit rate that needs to be passed
633  *	to driver when rate control is offloaded to firmware.
634  * @power_type: power type of BSS for 6 GHz
635  * @tx_pwr_env: transmit power envelope array of BSS.
636  * @tx_pwr_env_num: number of @tx_pwr_env.
637  * @pwr_reduction: power constraint of BSS.
638  * @eht_support: does this BSS support EHT
639  */
640 struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
641 	const u8 *bssid;
642 	u8 htc_trig_based_pkt_ext;
643 	bool uora_exists;
644 	u8 uora_ocw_range;
645 	u16 frame_time_rts_th;
646 	bool he_support;
647 	bool twt_requester;
648 	bool twt_responder;
649 	bool twt_protected;
650 	bool twt_broadcast;
651 	/* association related data */
652 	bool assoc, ibss_joined;
653 	bool ibss_creator;
654 	u16 aid;
655 	/* erp related data */
656 	bool use_cts_prot;
657 	bool use_short_preamble;
658 	bool use_short_slot;
659 	bool enable_beacon;
660 	u8 dtim_period;
661 	u16 beacon_int;
662 	u16 assoc_capability;
663 	u64 sync_tsf;
664 	u32 sync_device_ts;
665 	u8 sync_dtim_count;
666 	u32 basic_rates;
667 	struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
668 	int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
669 	u16 ht_operation_mode;
670 	s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
671 	u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
672 	s32 cqm_rssi_low;
673 	s32 cqm_rssi_high;
674 	struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
675 	struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group;
676 	__be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
677 	int arp_addr_cnt;
678 	bool qos;
679 	bool idle;
680 	bool ps;
681 	u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
682 	size_t ssid_len;
683 	bool hidden_ssid;
684 	int txpower;
685 	enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type;
686 	struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
687 	bool allow_p2p_go_ps;
688 	u16 max_idle_period;
689 	bool protected_keep_alive;
690 	bool ftm_responder;
691 	struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params *ftmr_params;
692 	/* Multiple BSSID data */
693 	bool nontransmitted;
694 	u8 transmitter_bssid[ETH_ALEN];
695 	u8 bssid_index;
696 	u8 bssid_indicator;
697 	bool ema_ap;
698 	u8 profile_periodicity;
699 	struct {
700 		u32 params;
701 		u16 nss_set;
702 	} he_oper;
703 	struct ieee80211_he_obss_pd he_obss_pd;
704 	struct cfg80211_he_bss_color he_bss_color;
705 	struct ieee80211_fils_discovery fils_discovery;
706 	u32 unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval;
707 	bool s1g;
708 	struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask beacon_tx_rate;
709 	enum ieee80211_ap_reg_power power_type;
710 	struct ieee80211_tx_pwr_env tx_pwr_env[IEEE80211_TPE_MAX_IE_COUNT];
711 	u8 tx_pwr_env_num;
712 	u8 pwr_reduction;
713 	bool eht_support;
714 };
715 
716 /**
717  * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
718  *
719  * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
720  *
721  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
722  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
723  *	number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
724  *	number and increasing the sequence number only when the
725  *	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
726  *	assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
727  *	for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
728  *	that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
729  *	If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
730  *	assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
731  *	802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
732  *	beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
733  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
734  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
735  *	station
736  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
737  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
738  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
739  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
740  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
741  *	because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
742  *	avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
743  *	firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
744  *	went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
745  *	the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
746  *	that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
747  *	since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
748  *	hardware queue.
749  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
750  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
751  * 	is for the whole aggregation.
752  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
753  * 	so consider using block ack request (BAR).
754  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
755  *	set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
756  *	be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
757  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
758  *	that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
759  *	off-channel operation.
760  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP: This frame uses hardware encapsulation
761  *	(header conversion)
762  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
763  *	used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
764  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
765  *	used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
766  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
767  *	frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
768  *	be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
769  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
770  *	transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
771  *	by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
772  *	queue gets full.
773  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
774  *	after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
775  *	be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
776  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
777  *	code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
778  *	should kick the MLME state machine.
779  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
780  *	MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
781  *	status to user space)
782  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
783  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
784  *	frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
785  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
786  *	the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
787  *	in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
788  *	handled properly by the device.
789  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
790  *	testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
791  *	TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
792  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
793  *	This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
794  *	frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
795  * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
796  *	when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
797  *	an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
798  *	the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
799  *	PS-Poll responses.
800  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
801  *	This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
802  *	the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
803  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
804  *	would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
805  *	monitor injection).
806  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with
807  *	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without
808  *	any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW).
809  *	This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack
810  *	behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK.
811  *
812  * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
813  *	 forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
814  */
815 enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
816 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS		= BIT(0),
817 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ		= BIT(1),
818 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK			= BIT(2),
819 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT		= BIT(3),
820 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT		= BIT(4),
821 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM	= BIT(5),
822 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU			= BIT(6),
823 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED		= BIT(7),
824 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED		= BIT(8),
825 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK			= BIT(9),
826 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU			= BIT(10),
827 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK		= BIT(11),
828 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE	= BIT(12),
829 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK	= BIT(13),
830 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP		= BIT(14),
831 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED		= BIT(15),
832 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT		= BIT(16),
833 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER		= BIT(17),
834 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES		= BIT(18),
835 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION	= BIT(19),
836 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX		= BIT(20),
837 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX	= BIT(21),
838 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC			= BIT(22),
839 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC			= BIT(23) | BIT(24),
840 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN		= BIT(25),
841 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE	= BIT(26),
842 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE		= BIT(27),
843 	IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP		= BIT(28),
844 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE		= BIT(29),
845 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG		= BIT(30),
846 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED	= BIT(31),
847 };
848 
849 #define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT		23
850 
851 #define IEEE80211_TX_RC_S1G_MCS IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS
852 
853 /**
854  * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
855  *
856  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
857  *	protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
858  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
859  *	frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
860  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information
861  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame
862  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path
863  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP: This frame skips mesh path lookup
864  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
865  *	used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
866  *	it can be sent out.
867  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO: Do not overwrite the sequence number that
868  *	has already been assigned to this frame.
869  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_REORDER: This frame should not be reordered
870  *	relative to other frames that have this flag set, independent
871  *	of their QoS TID or other priority field values.
872  *
873  * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
874  */
875 enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
876 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO	= BIT(0),
877 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE		= BIT(1),
878 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT		= BIT(2),
879 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU			= BIT(3),
880 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT		= BIT(4),
881 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP	= BIT(5),
882 	IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING	= BIT(6),
883 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO		= BIT(7),
884 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_REORDER		= BIT(8),
885 };
886 
887 /**
888  * enum mac80211_tx_status_flags - flags to describe transmit status
889  *
890  * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_ACK_SIGNAL_VALID: ACK signal is valid
891  *
892  * These flags are used in tx_info->status.flags.
893  */
894 enum mac80211_tx_status_flags {
895 	IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_ACK_SIGNAL_VALID = BIT(0),
896 };
897 
898 /*
899  * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
900  * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
901  */
902 #define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK |		      \
903 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT |    \
904 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU |	      \
905 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED |	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK |		      \
906 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK |	      \
907 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER |    \
908 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC |		      \
909 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
910 
911 /**
912  * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
913  *	Rate Control algorithm.
914  *
915  * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
916  * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
917  *
918  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
919  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
920  *	This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
921  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
922  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
923  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
924  *	into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
925  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
926  *	Greenfield mode.
927  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
928  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
929  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
930  *	(80+80 isn't supported yet)
931  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
932  *	adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
933  *	NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
934  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
935  */
936 enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
937 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS		= BIT(0),
938 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT		= BIT(1),
939 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE	= BIT(2),
940 
941 	/* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
942 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS			= BIT(3),
943 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD		= BIT(4),
944 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH		= BIT(5),
945 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA		= BIT(6),
946 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI		= BIT(7),
947 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS			= BIT(8),
948 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH		= BIT(9),
949 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH		= BIT(10),
950 };
951 
952 
953 /* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
954 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
955 
956 /* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
957 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
958 
959 /* maximum number of rate stages */
960 #define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES	4
961 
962 /* maximum number of rate table entries */
963 #define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE	4
964 
965 /**
966  * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
967  *
968  * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
969  * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
970  * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
971  *
972  * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
973  * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
974  *
975  * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
976  * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
977  *
978  * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
979  * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
980  * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
981  * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
982  * information::
983  *
984  *    { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
985  *
986  * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
987  * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
988  * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
989  * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
990  * information should then contain::
991  *
992  *   { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
993  *
994  * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
995  * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
996  */
997 struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
998 	s8 idx;
999 	u16 count:5,
1000 	    flags:11;
1001 } __packed;
1002 
1003 #define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY		31
1004 
1005 static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
1006 					  u8 mcs, u8 nss)
1007 {
1008 	WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
1009 	WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
1010 	rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
1011 }
1012 
1013 static inline u8
1014 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
1015 {
1016 	return rate->idx & 0xF;
1017 }
1018 
1019 static inline u8
1020 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
1021 {
1022 	return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
1023 }
1024 
1025 /**
1026  * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
1027  *
1028  * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
1029  *  (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
1030  *  (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
1031  *  (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
1032  *
1033  * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
1034  * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
1035  * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
1036  * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
1037  * @tx_time_est: TX time estimate in units of 4us, used internally
1038  * @control: union part for control data
1039  * @control.rates: TX rates array to try
1040  * @control.rts_cts_rate_idx: rate for RTS or CTS
1041  * @control.use_rts: use RTS
1042  * @control.use_cts_prot: use RTS/CTS
1043  * @control.short_preamble: use short preamble (CCK only)
1044  * @control.skip_table: skip externally configured rate table
1045  * @control.jiffies: timestamp for expiry on powersave clients
1046  * @control.vif: virtual interface (may be NULL)
1047  * @control.hw_key: key to encrypt with (may be NULL)
1048  * @control.flags: control flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_control_flags
1049  * @control.enqueue_time: enqueue time (for iTXQs)
1050  * @driver_rates: alias to @control.rates to reserve space
1051  * @pad: padding
1052  * @rate_driver_data: driver use area if driver needs @control.rates
1053  * @status: union part for status data
1054  * @status.rates: attempted rates
1055  * @status.ack_signal: ACK signal
1056  * @status.ampdu_ack_len: AMPDU ack length
1057  * @status.ampdu_len: AMPDU length
1058  * @status.antenna: (legacy, kept only for iwlegacy)
1059  * @status.tx_time: airtime consumed for transmission; note this is only
1060  *	used for WMM AC, not for airtime fairness
1061  * @status.flags: status flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_status_flags
1062  * @status.status_driver_data: driver use area
1063  * @ack: union part for pure ACK data
1064  * @ack.cookie: cookie for the ACK
1065  * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
1066  * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
1067  * 	relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
1068  * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
1069  * 	relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
1070  * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
1071  */
1072 struct ieee80211_tx_info {
1073 	/* common information */
1074 	u32 flags;
1075 	u32 band:3,
1076 	    ack_frame_id:13,
1077 	    hw_queue:4,
1078 	    tx_time_est:10;
1079 	/* 2 free bits */
1080 
1081 	union {
1082 		struct {
1083 			union {
1084 				/* rate control */
1085 				struct {
1086 					struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
1087 						IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1088 					s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
1089 					u8 use_rts:1;
1090 					u8 use_cts_prot:1;
1091 					u8 short_preamble:1;
1092 					u8 skip_table:1;
1093 					/* 2 bytes free */
1094 				};
1095 				/* only needed before rate control */
1096 				unsigned long jiffies;
1097 			};
1098 			/* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
1099 			struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
1100 			struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
1101 			u32 flags;
1102 			codel_time_t enqueue_time;
1103 		} control;
1104 		struct {
1105 			u64 cookie;
1106 		} ack;
1107 		struct {
1108 			struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1109 			s32 ack_signal;
1110 			u8 ampdu_ack_len;
1111 			u8 ampdu_len;
1112 			u8 antenna;
1113 			u16 tx_time;
1114 			u8 flags;
1115 			void *status_driver_data[18 / sizeof(void *)];
1116 		} status;
1117 		struct {
1118 			struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
1119 				IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1120 			u8 pad[4];
1121 
1122 			void *rate_driver_data[
1123 				IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1124 		};
1125 		void *driver_data[
1126 			IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1127 	};
1128 };
1129 
1130 static inline u16
1131 ieee80211_info_set_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info, u16 tx_time_est)
1132 {
1133 	/* We only have 10 bits in tx_time_est, so store airtime
1134 	 * in increments of 4us and clamp the maximum to 2**12-1
1135 	 */
1136 	info->tx_time_est = min_t(u16, tx_time_est, 4095) >> 2;
1137 	return info->tx_time_est << 2;
1138 }
1139 
1140 static inline u16
1141 ieee80211_info_get_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1142 {
1143 	return info->tx_time_est << 2;
1144 }
1145 
1146 /***
1147  * struct ieee80211_rate_status - mrr stage for status path
1148  *
1149  * This struct is used in struct ieee80211_tx_status to provide drivers a
1150  * dynamic way to report about used rates and power levels per packet.
1151  *
1152  * @rate_idx The actual used rate.
1153  * @try_count How often the rate was tried.
1154  * @tx_power_idx An idx into the ieee80211_hw->tx_power_levels list of the
1155  * 	corresponding wifi hardware. The idx shall point to the power level
1156  * 	that was used when sending the packet.
1157  */
1158 struct ieee80211_rate_status {
1159 	struct rate_info rate_idx;
1160 	u8 try_count;
1161 	u8 tx_power_idx;
1162 };
1163 
1164 /**
1165  * struct ieee80211_tx_status - extended tx status info for rate control
1166  *
1167  * @sta: Station that the packet was transmitted for
1168  * @info: Basic tx status information
1169  * @skb: Packet skb (can be NULL if not provided by the driver)
1170  * @rates: Mrr stages that were used when sending the packet
1171  * @n_rates: Number of mrr stages (count of instances for @rates)
1172  * @free_list: list where processed skbs are stored to be free'd by the driver
1173  */
1174 struct ieee80211_tx_status {
1175 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1176 	struct ieee80211_tx_info *info;
1177 	struct sk_buff *skb;
1178 	struct ieee80211_rate_status *rates;
1179 	u8 n_rates;
1180 
1181 	struct list_head *free_list;
1182 };
1183 
1184 /**
1185  * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
1186  *
1187  * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
1188  * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
1189  * and the ones generated by mac80211.
1190  *
1191  * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
1192  * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
1193  * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
1194  * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
1195  */
1196 struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
1197 	const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1198 	size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1199 	const u8 *common_ies;
1200 	size_t common_ie_len;
1201 };
1202 
1203 
1204 static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1205 {
1206 	return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
1207 }
1208 
1209 static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1210 {
1211 	return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
1212 }
1213 
1214 /**
1215  * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
1216  *
1217  * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
1218  *
1219  * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
1220  * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
1221  * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
1222  * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
1223  *
1224  * NOTE: While the rates array is kept intact, this will wipe all of the
1225  *	 driver_data fields in info, so it's up to the driver to restore
1226  *	 any fields it needs after calling this helper.
1227  */
1228 static inline void
1229 ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1230 {
1231 	int i;
1232 
1233 	BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1234 		     offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
1235 	BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1236 		     offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
1237 	BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
1238 	/* clear the rate counts */
1239 	for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
1240 		info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
1241 	memset_after(&info->status, 0, rates);
1242 }
1243 
1244 
1245 /**
1246  * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
1247  *
1248  * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1249  * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
1250  *	Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
1251  * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
1252  * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
1253  *	verification has been done by the hardware.
1254  * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame.
1255  *	If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
1256  *	hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
1257  * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this
1258  *	flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection.
1259  *	Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame
1260  *	is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set)
1261  * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did
1262  *	de-duplication by itself.
1263  * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
1264  *	the frame.
1265  * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
1266  *	the frame.
1267  * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1268  *	field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
1269  *	was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
1270  *	merging.
1271  * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1272  *	field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
1273  *	(including FCS) was received.
1274  * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1275  *	field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received.
1276  * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
1277  *	Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
1278  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
1279  *	number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
1280  *	each A-MPDU
1281  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
1282  *	subframes of a single A-MPDU
1283  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
1284  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
1285  *	on this subframe
1286  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
1287  *	is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
1288  * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was
1289  *	done by the hardware
1290  * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without
1291  *	processing it in any regular way.
1292  *	This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1293  *	them for sniffing purposes.
1294  * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except
1295  *	monitor interfaces.
1296  *	This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1297  *	them for sniffing purposes.
1298  * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
1299  *	subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
1300  *	All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
1301  *	if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
1302  *	the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
1303  *	deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
1304  *	subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
1305  *	either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
1306  *	interleaved with other frames.
1307  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific
1308  *	radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by
1309  *	the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap.
1310  * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before.
1311  *	This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as
1312  *	the first subframe.
1313  * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must
1314  *	be done in the hardware.
1315  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT: Value of the EOF bit in the A-MPDU delimiter for this
1316  *	frame
1317  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN: The EOF value is known
1318  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE: HE radiotap data is present
1319  *	(&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he, mac80211 will fill in
1320  *
1321  *	 - DATA3_DATA_MCS
1322  *	 - DATA3_DATA_DCM
1323  *	 - DATA3_CODING
1324  *	 - DATA5_GI
1325  *	 - DATA5_DATA_BW_RU_ALLOC
1326  *	 - DATA6_NSTS
1327  *	 - DATA3_STBC
1328  *
1329  *	from the RX info data, so leave those zeroed when building this data)
1330  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU: HE MU radiotap data is present
1331  *	(&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he_mu)
1332  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG: L-SIG radiotap data is present
1333  * @RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU: use the frame only for radiotap reporting, with
1334  *	the "0-length PSDU" field included there.  The value for it is
1335  *	in &struct ieee80211_rx_status.  Note that if this value isn't
1336  *	known the frame shouldn't be reported.
1337  * @RX_FLAG_8023: the frame has an 802.3 header (decap offload performed by
1338  *	hardware or driver)
1339  */
1340 enum mac80211_rx_flags {
1341 	RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR		= BIT(0),
1342 	RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED		= BIT(1),
1343 	RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START	= BIT(2),
1344 	RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED		= BIT(3),
1345 	RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED		= BIT(4),
1346 	RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC		= BIT(5),
1347 	RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC 	= BIT(6),
1348 	RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START		= BIT(7),
1349 	RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL		= BIT(8),
1350 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS		= BIT(9),
1351 	RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED		= BIT(10),
1352 	RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED		= BIT(11),
1353 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN	= BIT(12),
1354 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST		= BIT(13),
1355 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR	= BIT(14),
1356 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN	= BIT(15),
1357 	RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END		= BIT(16),
1358 	RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR		= BIT(17),
1359 	RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR		= BIT(18),
1360 	RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE		= BIT(19),
1361 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA	= BIT(20),
1362 	RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED		= BIT(21),
1363 	RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN		= BIT(22),
1364 	RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED		= BIT(23),
1365 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT		= BIT(24),
1366 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN	= BIT(25),
1367 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE		= BIT(26),
1368 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU		= BIT(27),
1369 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG		= BIT(28),
1370 	RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU			= BIT(29),
1371 	RX_FLAG_8023			= BIT(30),
1372 };
1373 
1374 /**
1375  * enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags - MCS & bandwidth flags
1376  *
1377  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
1378  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
1379  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission,
1380  *	if the driver fills this value it should add
1381  *	%IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
1382  *	to @hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact.
1383  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
1384  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
1385  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
1386  */
1387 enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags {
1388 	RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE		= BIT(0),
1389 	RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI		= BIT(2),
1390 	RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF		= BIT(3),
1391 	RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK		= BIT(4) | BIT(5),
1392 	RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC		= BIT(6),
1393 	RX_ENC_FLAG_BF			= BIT(7),
1394 };
1395 
1396 #define RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT		4
1397 
1398 enum mac80211_rx_encoding {
1399 	RX_ENC_LEGACY = 0,
1400 	RX_ENC_HT,
1401 	RX_ENC_VHT,
1402 	RX_ENC_HE,
1403 };
1404 
1405 /**
1406  * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
1407  *
1408  * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
1409  * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
1410  * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
1411  *
1412  * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
1413  * 	(TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
1414  * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is
1415  *	needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache.
1416  * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
1417  *	it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
1418  * @band: the active band when this frame was received
1419  * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
1420  *	This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed
1421  *	for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting.
1422  * @freq_offset: @freq has a positive offset of 500Khz.
1423  * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
1424  *	unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
1425  *	@IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
1426  * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
1427  *	values were filled.
1428  * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
1429  *	support dB or unspecified units)
1430  * @antenna: antenna used
1431  * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
1432  *	HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
1433  * @nss: number of streams (VHT and HE only)
1434  * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\*
1435  * @encoding: &enum mac80211_rx_encoding
1436  * @bw: &enum rate_info_bw
1437  * @enc_flags: uses bits from &enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags
1438  * @he_ru: HE RU, from &enum nl80211_he_ru_alloc
1439  * @he_gi: HE GI, from &enum nl80211_he_gi
1440  * @he_dcm: HE DCM value
1441  * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
1442  * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
1443  *	each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
1444  * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
1445  * @zero_length_psdu_type: radiotap type of the 0-length PSDU
1446  */
1447 struct ieee80211_rx_status {
1448 	u64 mactime;
1449 	u64 boottime_ns;
1450 	u32 device_timestamp;
1451 	u32 ampdu_reference;
1452 	u32 flag;
1453 	u16 freq: 13, freq_offset: 1;
1454 	u8 enc_flags;
1455 	u8 encoding:2, bw:3, he_ru:3;
1456 	u8 he_gi:2, he_dcm:1;
1457 	u8 rate_idx;
1458 	u8 nss;
1459 	u8 rx_flags;
1460 	u8 band;
1461 	u8 antenna;
1462 	s8 signal;
1463 	u8 chains;
1464 	s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
1465 	u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
1466 	u8 zero_length_psdu_type;
1467 };
1468 
1469 static inline u32
1470 ieee80211_rx_status_to_khz(struct ieee80211_rx_status *rx_status)
1471 {
1472 	return MHZ_TO_KHZ(rx_status->freq) +
1473 	       (rx_status->freq_offset ? 500 : 0);
1474 }
1475 
1476 /**
1477  * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information
1478  * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace
1479  *	(this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more
1480  *	 bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that)
1481  * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed
1482  *	alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace
1483  *	description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment)
1484  *	Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1!
1485  * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
1486  * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
1487  * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done
1488  *	then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the
1489  *	@data field.
1490  * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that
1491  *	the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd
1492  *	length
1493  * @data: the actual vendor namespace data
1494  *
1495  * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before
1496  * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns
1497  * data.
1498  */
1499 struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap {
1500 	u32 present;
1501 	u8 align;
1502 	u8 oui[3];
1503 	u8 subns;
1504 	u8 pad;
1505 	u16 len;
1506 	u8 data[];
1507 } __packed;
1508 
1509 /**
1510  * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
1511  *
1512  * Flags to define PHY configuration options
1513  *
1514  * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
1515  *	to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
1516  *	or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
1517  * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
1518  *	This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
1519  *	meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
1520  *	transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
1521  *	Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
1522  *	driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
1523  *	for more.
1524  * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
1525  *	the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
1526  *	may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
1527  *	be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1528  *	it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
1529  * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1530  *	operating channel.
1531  */
1532 enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
1533 	IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR		= (1<<0),
1534 	IEEE80211_CONF_PS		= (1<<1),
1535 	IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE		= (1<<2),
1536 	IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL	= (1<<3),
1537 };
1538 
1539 
1540 /**
1541  * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1542  *
1543  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
1544  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
1545  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
1546  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
1547  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
1548  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
1549  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
1550  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
1551  *	Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1552  *	otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1553  */
1554 enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
1555 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS		= BIT(1),
1556 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL	= BIT(2),
1557 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR		= BIT(3),
1558 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS		= BIT(4),
1559 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER		= BIT(5),
1560 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL		= BIT(6),
1561 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS	= BIT(7),
1562 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE		= BIT(8),
1563 };
1564 
1565 /**
1566  * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1567  *
1568  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1569  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1570  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1571  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1572  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
1573  */
1574 enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1575 	IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1576 	IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1577 	IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1578 	IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1579 
1580 	/* keep last */
1581 	IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1582 };
1583 
1584 /**
1585  * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1586  *
1587  * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1588  *
1589  * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1590  *
1591  * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
1592  * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1593  *	in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1594  *	has been received and the DTIM period is known.
1595  * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1596  *	powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1597  *	the CONF_PS flag is set.
1598  *
1599  * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1600  *	value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
1601  *
1602  * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
1603  * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
1604  *
1605  * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
1606  *	(a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1607  *	but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
1608  * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
1609  *	frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1610  *	number of transmissions not the number of retries
1611  *
1612  * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1613  *	%IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
1614  *	configured for an HT channel.
1615  *	Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1616  *	otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1617  */
1618 struct ieee80211_conf {
1619 	u32 flags;
1620 	int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
1621 
1622 	u16 listen_interval;
1623 	u8 ps_dtim_period;
1624 
1625 	u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1626 
1627 	struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1628 	bool radar_enabled;
1629 	enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
1630 };
1631 
1632 /**
1633  * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1634  *
1635  * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1636  * operation.
1637  *
1638  * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1639  *	Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1640  *	announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1641  *	the driver passed into mac80211.
1642  * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
1643  *	rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
1644  * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1645  *	scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
1646  * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
1647  * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1648  * @delay: maximum delay between the time the AP transmitted the last beacon in
1649   *	current channel and the expected time of the first beacon in the new
1650   *	channel, expressed in TU.
1651  */
1652 struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1653 	u64 timestamp;
1654 	u32 device_timestamp;
1655 	bool block_tx;
1656 	struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1657 	u8 count;
1658 	u32 delay;
1659 };
1660 
1661 /**
1662  * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1663  *
1664  * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1665  *	on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
1666  * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1667  *	monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1668  *	connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1669  *	provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
1670  * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this
1671  *	interface. This flag should be set during interface addition,
1672  *	but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is
1673  *	only valid for managed/station mode interfaces.
1674  * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes
1675  *	and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even
1676  *	this is not pure P2P vif.
1677  */
1678 enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1679 	IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER		= BIT(0),
1680 	IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI		= BIT(1),
1681 	IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD		= BIT(2),
1682 	IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE		= BIT(3),
1683 };
1684 
1685 
1686 /**
1687  * enum ieee80211_offload_flags - virtual interface offload flags
1688  *
1689  * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED: tx encapsulation offload is enabled
1690  *	The driver supports sending frames passed as 802.3 frames by mac80211.
1691  *	It must also support sending 802.11 packets for the same interface.
1692  * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR: support 4-address mode encapsulation offload
1693  * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_DECAP_ENABLED: rx encapsulation offload is enabled
1694  *	The driver supports passing received 802.11 frames as 802.3 frames to
1695  *	mac80211.
1696  */
1697 
1698 enum ieee80211_offload_flags {
1699 	IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED		= BIT(0),
1700 	IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR		= BIT(1),
1701 	IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_DECAP_ENABLED		= BIT(2),
1702 };
1703 
1704 /**
1705  * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1706  *
1707  * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1708  * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1709  *
1710  * @type: type of this virtual interface
1711  * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1712  *	or the BSS we're associated to
1713  * @addr: address of this interface
1714  * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1715  *	interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
1716  * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
1717  *	write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
1718  *	for read access.
1719  * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability
1720  * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1721  *	these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1722  *	or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1723  *	at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
1724  * @offload_flags: hardware offload capabilities/flags for this interface.
1725  *	These are initialized by mac80211 before calling .add_interface,
1726  *	.change_interface or .update_vif_offload and updated by the driver
1727  *	within these ops, based on supported features or runtime change
1728  *	restrictions.
1729  * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1730  * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
1731  * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
1732  *	when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
1733  *	path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
1734  *	be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
1735  *	processed after it switches back to %NULL.
1736  * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
1737  *	interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
1738  *	monitor interface (if that is requested.)
1739  * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this
1740  *	interface.
1741  * @rx_mcast_action_reg: multicast Action frames should be reported to mac80211
1742  *	for this interface.
1743  * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1744  *	sizeof(void \*).
1745  * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
1746  * @txqs_stopped: per AC flag to indicate that intermediate TXQs are stopped,
1747  *	protected by fq->lock.
1748  * @offload_flags: 802.3 -> 802.11 enapsulation offload flags, see
1749  *	&enum ieee80211_offload_flags.
1750  * @color_change_active: marks whether a color change is ongoing. Internally it is
1751  *	write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
1752  *	for read access.
1753  * @color_change_color: the bss color that will be used after the change.
1754  * @mbssid_tx_vif: Pointer to the transmitting interface if MBSSID is enabled.
1755  */
1756 struct ieee80211_vif {
1757 	enum nl80211_iftype type;
1758 	struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
1759 	u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2);
1760 	bool p2p;
1761 	bool csa_active;
1762 	bool mu_mimo_owner;
1763 
1764 	u8 cab_queue;
1765 	u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1766 
1767 	struct ieee80211_txq *txq;
1768 
1769 	struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
1770 
1771 	u32 driver_flags;
1772 	u32 offload_flags;
1773 
1774 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1775 	struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1776 #endif
1777 
1778 	bool probe_req_reg;
1779 	bool rx_mcast_action_reg;
1780 
1781 	bool txqs_stopped[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1782 
1783 	bool color_change_active;
1784 	u8 color_change_color;
1785 
1786 	struct ieee80211_vif *mbssid_tx_vif;
1787 
1788 	/* must be last */
1789 	u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1790 };
1791 
1792 static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1793 {
1794 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
1795 	return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
1796 #endif
1797 	return false;
1798 }
1799 
1800 /**
1801  * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1802  * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1803  *
1804  * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1805  * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1806  *
1807  * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1808  * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1809  * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1810  */
1811 struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1812 
1813 /**
1814  * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif
1815  * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for
1816  *
1817  * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1818  * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif.
1819  * This can also be useful to get the netdev associated to a vif.
1820  */
1821 struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
1822 
1823 /**
1824  * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1825  *
1826  * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1827  * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1828  *
1829  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1830  *	driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
1831  *	particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
1832  *	will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
1833  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1834  *	the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1835  *	generation in software.
1836  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1837  *	that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
1838  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
1839  *	CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames
1840  *	(MFP) to be done in software.
1841  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
1842  *	if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
1843  *	itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
1844  *	@IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
1845  *	not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
1846  *	MIC.
1847  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1848  *	management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1849  *	crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1850  *	properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1851  *	fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1852  *	RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1853  *	%IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
1854  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
1855  *	driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
1856  *	only for management frames (MFP).
1857  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the
1858  *	driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always
1859  *	be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled.
1860  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver for
1861  *	a TKIP key if it only requires MIC space. Do not set together with
1862  *	@IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC on the same key.
1863  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX: Key needs explicit Tx activation.
1864  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE: This flag should be set by the driver
1865  *	for a AES_CMAC key to indicate that it requires sequence number
1866  *	generation only
1867  */
1868 enum ieee80211_key_flags {
1869 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT	= BIT(0),
1870 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV		= BIT(1),
1871 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC	= BIT(2),
1872 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE		= BIT(3),
1873 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX		= BIT(4),
1874 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE		= BIT(5),
1875 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT		= BIT(6),
1876 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM	= BIT(7),
1877 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE	= BIT(8),
1878 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX		= BIT(9),
1879 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE	= BIT(10),
1880 };
1881 
1882 /**
1883  * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1884  *
1885  * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1886  * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1887  *
1888  * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1889  *	wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
1890  *	encrypted in hardware.
1891  * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
1892  * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it
1893  *	needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO)
1894  * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1895  * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1896  * @keylen: key material length
1897  * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1898  * 	data block:
1899  * 	- Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1900  * 	- Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1901  * 	- Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
1902  * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1903  * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
1904  */
1905 struct ieee80211_key_conf {
1906 	atomic64_t tx_pn;
1907 	u32 cipher;
1908 	u8 icv_len;
1909 	u8 iv_len;
1910 	u8 hw_key_idx;
1911 	s8 keyidx;
1912 	u16 flags;
1913 	u8 keylen;
1914 	u8 key[];
1915 };
1916 
1917 #define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN	16
1918 
1919 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff))
1920 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff))
1921 
1922 /**
1923  * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
1924  *
1925  * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
1926  * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1927  *	reverse order than in packet)
1928  * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1929  *	reverse order than in packet)
1930  * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1931  *	reverse order than in packet)
1932  * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1933  *	reverse order than in packet)
1934  * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys
1935  */
1936 struct ieee80211_key_seq {
1937 	union {
1938 		struct {
1939 			u32 iv32;
1940 			u16 iv16;
1941 		} tkip;
1942 		struct {
1943 			u8 pn[6];
1944 		} ccmp;
1945 		struct {
1946 			u8 pn[6];
1947 		} aes_cmac;
1948 		struct {
1949 			u8 pn[6];
1950 		} aes_gmac;
1951 		struct {
1952 			u8 pn[6];
1953 		} gcmp;
1954 		struct {
1955 			u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN];
1956 			u8 seq_len;
1957 		} hw;
1958 	};
1959 };
1960 
1961 /**
1962  * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme
1963  *
1964  * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining
1965  * the secure packet crypto handling.
1966  *
1967  * @cipher: a cipher suite selector
1968  * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage
1969  * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher
1970  * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header
1971  * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header
1972  * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header
1973  * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits
1974  * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx
1975  *     key_idx value calculation:
1976  *      (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift
1977  * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes
1978  */
1979 struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme {
1980 	u32 cipher;
1981 	u16 iftype;
1982 	u8 hdr_len;
1983 	u8 pn_len;
1984 	u8 pn_off;
1985 	u8 key_idx_off;
1986 	u8 key_idx_mask;
1987 	u8 key_idx_shift;
1988 	u8 mic_len;
1989 };
1990 
1991 /**
1992  * enum set_key_cmd - key command
1993  *
1994  * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1995  * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
1996  *
1997  * @SET_KEY: a key is set
1998  * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
1999  */
2000 enum set_key_cmd {
2001 	SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
2002 };
2003 
2004 /**
2005  * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
2006  *
2007  * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
2008  *	this is a special state for add/remove transitions
2009  * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
2010  * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
2011  * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
2012  * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
2013  */
2014 enum ieee80211_sta_state {
2015 	/* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
2016 	IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
2017 	IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
2018 	IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
2019 	IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
2020 	IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
2021 };
2022 
2023 /**
2024  * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
2025  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
2026  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
2027  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
2028  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
2029  *	(including 80+80 MHz)
2030  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_320: station can receive up to 320 MHz
2031  *
2032  * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
2033  *	correctly, the values must be sorted.
2034  */
2035 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
2036 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
2037 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
2038 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
2039 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
2040 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_320,
2041 };
2042 
2043 /**
2044  * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
2045  *
2046  * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
2047  * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
2048  *	Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
2049  */
2050 struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
2051 	struct rcu_head rcu_head;
2052 	struct {
2053 		s8 idx;
2054 		u8 count;
2055 		u8 count_cts;
2056 		u8 count_rts;
2057 		u16 flags;
2058 	} rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
2059 };
2060 
2061 /**
2062  * struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr - station txpower configuration
2063  *
2064  * Used to configure txpower for station.
2065  *
2066  * @power: indicates the tx power, in dBm, to be used when sending data frames
2067  *	to the STA.
2068  * @type: In particular if TPC %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED then tx power
2069  *	will be less than or equal to specified from userspace, whereas if TPC
2070  *	%type is NL80211_TX_POWER_AUTOMATIC then it indicates default tx power.
2071  *	NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED is not a valid configuration option for
2072  *	per peer TPC.
2073  */
2074 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr {
2075 	s16 power;
2076 	enum nl80211_tx_power_setting type;
2077 };
2078 
2079 #define MAX_STA_LINKS			15
2080 
2081 /**
2082  * struct ieee80211_link_sta - station Link specific info
2083  * All link specific info for a STA link for a non MLD STA(single)
2084  * or a MLD STA(multiple entries) are stored here.
2085  *
2086  * @addr: MAC address of the Link STA. For non-MLO STA this is same as the addr
2087  *	in ieee80211_sta. For MLO Link STA this addr can be same or different
2088  *	from addr in ieee80211_sta (representing MLD STA addr)
2089  * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates
2090  * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
2091  * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
2092  * @he_cap: HE capabilities of this STA
2093  * @he_6ghz_capa: on 6 GHz, holds the HE 6 GHz band capabilities
2094  * @eht_cap: EHT capabilities of this STA
2095  * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
2096  * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
2097  *	station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
2098  *	notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
2099  *	the station moves to associated state.
2100  * @txpwr: the station tx power configuration
2101  *
2102  */
2103 struct ieee80211_link_sta {
2104 	u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
2105 
2106 	u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
2107 	struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
2108 	struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
2109 	struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap he_cap;
2110 	struct ieee80211_he_6ghz_capa he_6ghz_capa;
2111 	struct ieee80211_sta_eht_cap eht_cap;
2112 
2113 	u8 rx_nss;
2114 	enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
2115 	struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr txpwr;
2116 };
2117 
2118 /**
2119  * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
2120  *
2121  * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
2122  * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
2123  * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
2124  * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
2125  * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
2126  * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
2127  * This also represents the MLD STA in case of MLO association
2128  * and holds pointers to various link STA's
2129  *
2130  * @addr: MAC address
2131  * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
2132  * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU
2133  *	that this station is allowed to transmit to us.
2134  *	Can be modified by driver.
2135  * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does,
2136  *	otherwise always false)
2137  * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
2138  *	sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information.
2139  * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
2140  *	if wme is supported. The bits order is like in
2141  *	IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*.
2142  * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
2143  * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
2144  * @rates: rate control selection table
2145  * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
2146  * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
2147  *	valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
2148  * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not.
2149  * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single
2150  *	A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means
2151  *	unlimited.
2152  * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not.
2153  * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control.
2154  * @max_tid_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes for this TID
2155  * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction); note that
2156  *	the last entry (%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS) is used for non-data frames
2157  * @multi_link_sta: Identifies if this sta is a MLD STA
2158  * @deflink: This holds the default link STA information, for non MLO STA all link
2159  *	specific STA information is accessed through @deflink or through
2160  *	link[0] which points to address of @deflink. For MLO Link STA
2161  *	the first added link STA will point to deflink.
2162  * @link: reference to Link Sta entries. For Non MLO STA, except 1st link,
2163  *	i.e link[0] all links would be assigned to NULL by default and
2164  *	would access link information via @deflink or link[0]. For MLO
2165  *	STA, first link STA being added will point its link pointer to
2166  *	@deflink address and remaining would be allocated and the address
2167  *	would be assigned to link[link_id] where link_id is the id assigned
2168  *	by the AP.
2169  */
2170 struct ieee80211_sta {
2171 	u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
2172 	u16 aid;
2173 	u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2174 	bool wme;
2175 	u8 uapsd_queues;
2176 	u8 max_sp;
2177 	enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
2178 	struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
2179 	bool tdls;
2180 	bool tdls_initiator;
2181 	bool mfp;
2182 	u8 max_amsdu_subframes;
2183 
2184 	/**
2185 	 * @max_amsdu_len:
2186 	 * indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes.
2187 	 * This field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble.
2188 	 * For packets with a HT preamble, additional limits apply:
2189 	 *
2190 	 * * If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the
2191 	 *   A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes.
2192 	 * * If the skb is not part of a BA agreement, the A-MSDU maximal
2193 	 *   size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes.
2194 	 *
2195 	 * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level
2196 	 * driver. This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section
2197 	 * 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2).
2198 	 */
2199 	u16 max_amsdu_len;
2200 	bool support_p2p_ps;
2201 	u16 max_rc_amsdu_len;
2202 	u16 max_tid_amsdu_len[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS];
2203 
2204 	struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS + 1];
2205 
2206 	bool multi_link_sta;
2207 	struct ieee80211_link_sta deflink;
2208 	struct ieee80211_link_sta *link[MAX_STA_LINKS];
2209 
2210 	/* must be last */
2211 	u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2212 };
2213 
2214 /**
2215  * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
2216  *
2217  * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
2218  * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
2219  *
2220  * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
2221  * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
2222  */
2223 enum sta_notify_cmd {
2224 	STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
2225 };
2226 
2227 /**
2228  * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
2229  *
2230  * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
2231  * 	it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
2232  */
2233 struct ieee80211_tx_control {
2234 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2235 };
2236 
2237 /**
2238  * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue
2239  *
2240  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
2241  * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue
2242  * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue),
2243  *	%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS for non-data (if enabled)
2244  * @ac: the AC for this queue
2245  * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size
2246  *
2247  * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling
2248  * ieee80211_tx_dequeue().
2249  */
2250 struct ieee80211_txq {
2251 	struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
2252 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2253 	u8 tid;
2254 	u8 ac;
2255 
2256 	/* must be last */
2257 	u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2258 };
2259 
2260 /**
2261  * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
2262  *
2263  * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
2264  * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
2265  * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
2266  * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
2267  * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
2268  *
2269  * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
2270  *	The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
2271  *	controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
2272  *	should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
2273  *	will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
2274  *	algorithm.
2275  *	Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
2276  *	callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
2277  *	the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
2278  *	@use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
2279  *	timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
2280  *	CCK frames.
2281  *
2282  * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
2283  *	Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
2284  *	the FCS at the end.
2285  *
2286  * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
2287  *	Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
2288  *	for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
2289  *	rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
2290  *	to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
2291  *	multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
2292  *	the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
2293  *
2294  * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
2295  *	Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
2296  *	expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
2297  *	If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
2298  *
2299  * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
2300  *	Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
2301  *	one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
2302  *	between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
2303  *
2304  * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
2305  * 	Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
2306  * 	Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
2307  *
2308  * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
2309  *	Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
2310  *
2311  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
2312  *	Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
2313  *
2314  * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
2315  *	Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
2316  *	stack support for dynamic PS.
2317  *
2318  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
2319  *	Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
2320  *
2321  * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
2322  *	Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
2323  *
2324  * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
2325  *	Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
2326  *	the stack.
2327  *
2328  * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
2329  *	The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
2330  *	periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
2331  *
2332  * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
2333  *	This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
2334  *	dtim_period).
2335  *
2336  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
2337  *	per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
2338  *	the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
2339  *	to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
2340  *	possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
2341  *	only in that case.
2342  *
2343  * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
2344  *	autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
2345  *	this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
2346  *	stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
2347  *	Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
2348  *	the PS mode of connected stations.
2349  *
2350  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
2351  *	setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
2352  *	software.
2353  *
2354  * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
2355  *	a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
2356  *	active interfaces.
2357  *
2358  * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
2359  *	be created.  It is expected user-space will create vifs as
2360  *	desired (and thus have them named as desired).
2361  *
2362  * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the
2363  *	crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically
2364  *	try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if
2365  *	the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its
2366  *	supported cipher suites.
2367  *
2368  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit,
2369  *	this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration
2370  *	for frames.
2371  *
2372  * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
2373  *	queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
2374  *	for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
2375  *	control for more details.
2376  *
2377  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
2378  *	selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
2379  *
2380  * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
2381  *	P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
2382  *	is supported.
2383  *
2384  * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
2385  *	only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
2386  *
2387  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
2388  *	and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
2389  *	using aggregation for such frames.)
2390  *
2391  * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
2392  *	for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
2393  *	is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
2394  *	CSA frame.
2395  *
2396  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
2397  *	or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
2398  *
2399  * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
2400  *	in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
2401  *
2402  * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth
2403  *	than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel.
2404  *
2405  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs
2406  *	within A-MPDU.
2407  *
2408  * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status
2409  *	for sent beacons.
2410  *
2411  * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each
2412  *	station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified
2413  *	by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station
2414  *	from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time.
2415  *
2416  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the
2417  *	reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in
2418  *	order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session
2419  *	timeout.
2420  *
2421  * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX,
2422  *	which implies using per-CPU station statistics.
2423  *
2424  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated
2425  *	A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support.
2426  *	When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must
2427  *	limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting
2428  *	max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta.
2429  *
2430  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list
2431  *	skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU.
2432  *
2433  * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event
2434  *	by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such
2435  *	drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver
2436  *	is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout.
2437  *
2438  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself.
2439  *	The stack will not do fragmentation.
2440  *	The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well.
2441  *
2442  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA: Hardware supports buffer STA on
2443  *	TDLS links.
2444  *
2445  * @IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP: The driver requires the
2446  *	mgd_prepare_tx() callback to be called before transmission of a
2447  *	deauthentication frame in case the association was completed but no
2448  *	beacon was heard. This is required in multi-channel scenarios, where the
2449  *	virtual interface might not be given air time for the transmission of
2450  *	the frame, as it is not synced with the AP/P2P GO yet, and thus the
2451  *	deauthentication frame might not be transmitted.
2452  *
2453  * @IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP: The driver (or firmware) doesn't
2454  *	support QoS NDP for AP probing - that's most likely a driver bug.
2455  *
2456  * @IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ: use the TXQ for bufferable MMPDUs, this of
2457  *	course requires the driver to use TXQs to start with.
2458  *
2459  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: (Hardware) rate control supports VHT
2460  *	extended NSS BW (dot11VHTExtendedNSSBWCapable). This flag will be set if
2461  *	the selected rate control algorithm sets %RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW
2462  *	but if the rate control is built-in then it must be set by the driver.
2463  *	See also the documentation for that flag.
2464  *
2465  * @IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ: use the extra non-TID per-station TXQ for all
2466  *	MMPDUs on station interfaces. This of course requires the driver to use
2467  *	TXQs to start with.
2468  *
2469  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN: Driver does not report accurate A-MPDU
2470  *	length in tx status information
2471  *
2472  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
2473  *
2474  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
2475  *	only for HE APs. Applies if @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID is set.
2476  *
2477  * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT: The card and driver is only
2478  *	aggregating MPDUs with the same keyid, allowing mac80211 to keep Tx
2479  *	A-MPDU sessions active while rekeying with Extended Key ID.
2480  *
2481  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD: Hardware supports tx encapsulation
2482  *	offload
2483  *
2484  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RX_DECAP_OFFLOAD: Hardware supports rx decapsulation
2485  *	offload
2486  *
2487  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CONC_MON_RX_DECAP: Hardware supports concurrent rx
2488  *	decapsulation offload and passing raw 802.11 frames for monitor iface.
2489  *	If this is supported, the driver must pass both 802.3 frames for real
2490  *	usage and 802.11 frames with %RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR set for monitor to
2491  *	the stack.
2492  *
2493  * @IEEE80211_HW_DETECTS_COLOR_COLLISION: HW/driver has support for BSS color
2494  *	collision detection and doesn't need it in software.
2495  *
2496  * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays
2497  */
2498 enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
2499 	IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL,
2500 	IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS,
2501 	IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING,
2502 	IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC,
2503 	IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM,
2504 	IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC,
2505 	IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT,
2506 	IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION,
2507 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS,
2508 	IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK,
2509 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS,
2510 	IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE,
2511 	IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF,
2512 	IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF,
2513 	IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL,
2514 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT,
2515 	IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS,
2516 	IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR,
2517 	IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL,
2518 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK,
2519 	IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS,
2520 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW,
2521 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE,
2522 	IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF,
2523 	IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY,
2524 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES,
2525 	IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA,
2526 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS,
2527 	IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS,
2528 	IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW,
2529 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU,
2530 	IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS,
2531 	IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR,
2532 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER,
2533 	IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS,
2534 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU,
2535 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST,
2536 	IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK,
2537 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG,
2538 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA,
2539 	IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP,
2540 	IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP,
2541 	IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ,
2542 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW,
2543 	IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ,
2544 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN,
2545 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID,
2546 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID,
2547 	IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT,
2548 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD,
2549 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RX_DECAP_OFFLOAD,
2550 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CONC_MON_RX_DECAP,
2551 	IEEE80211_HW_DETECTS_COLOR_COLLISION,
2552 
2553 	/* keep last, obviously */
2554 	NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS
2555 };
2556 
2557 /**
2558  * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
2559  *
2560  * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
2561  * information for an 802.11 PHY.
2562  *
2563  * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
2564  *	802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
2565  *	members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
2566  *	and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
2567  *	bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
2568  *
2569  * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
2570  *
2571  * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
2572  *	along with this structure.
2573  *
2574  * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
2575  *
2576  * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
2577  *	for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
2578  *
2579  * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
2580  *	Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
2581  *
2582  * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
2583  *	only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
2584  *
2585  * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
2586  *	that HW supports
2587  *
2588  * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
2589  *	data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
2590  *	queues need to have configurable access parameters.
2591  *
2592  * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
2593  *	If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
2594  *	set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
2595  *
2596  * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2597  *	within &struct ieee80211_vif.
2598  * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2599  *	within &struct ieee80211_sta.
2600  * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2601  *	within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
2602  * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2603  *	within @struct ieee80211_txq.
2604  *
2605  * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
2606  *	can handle.
2607  * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
2608  *	the hw can report back.
2609  * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
2610  *
2611  * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
2612  *	sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
2613  *	aggregation.
2614  *	This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
2615  *	number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
2616  *	it shouldn't be set.
2617  *
2618  * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
2619  *	aggregate an HT/HE device will transmit. In HT AddBA we'll
2620  *	advertise a constant value of 64 as some older APs crash if
2621  *	the window size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N
2622  *	with FW v1.0.07 build 002 Jun 18 2012).
2623  *	For AddBA to HE capable peers this value will be used.
2624  *
2625  * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum
2626  *	of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list.
2627  *
2628  * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
2629  *	(if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
2630  *
2631  * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
2632  *	reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
2633  *	include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only
2634  *	adding _BW is supported today.
2635  *
2636  * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
2637  *	the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
2638  *	Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values.
2639  *
2640  * @radiotap_he: HE radiotap validity flags
2641  *
2642  * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the
2643  *	@units_pos member is set to a non-negative value then the timestamp
2644  *	field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status
2645  *	device_timestamp.
2646  * @radiotap_timestamp.units_pos: Must be set to a combination of a
2647  *	IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a
2648  *	IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value.
2649  * @radiotap_timestamp.accuracy: If non-negative, fills the accuracy in the
2650  *	radiotap field and the accuracy known flag will be set.
2651  *
2652  * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
2653  *	from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211,
2654  *	other features will be rejected during HW registration.
2655  *
2656  * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
2657  *	for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
2658  *	enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
2659  *	Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
2660  *	that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
2661  *	neither enabled.
2662  *
2663  * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
2664  *	deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
2665  *	Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
2666  *
2667  * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions.
2668  * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions
2669  *	supported by HW.
2670  * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the
2671  *	device.
2672  *
2673  * @tx_sk_pacing_shift: Pacing shift to set on TCP sockets when frames from
2674  *	them are encountered. The default should typically not be changed,
2675  *	unless the driver has good reasons for needing more buffers.
2676  *
2677  * @weight_multiplier: Driver specific airtime weight multiplier used while
2678  *	refilling deficit of each TXQ.
2679  *
2680  * @max_mtu: the max mtu could be set.
2681  *
2682  * @tx_power_levels: a list of power levels supported by the wifi hardware.
2683  * 	The power levels can be specified either as integer or fractions.
2684  * 	The power level at idx 0 shall be the maximum positive power level.
2685  *
2686  * @max_txpwr_levels_idx: the maximum valid idx of 'tx_power_levels' list.
2687  */
2688 struct ieee80211_hw {
2689 	struct ieee80211_conf conf;
2690 	struct wiphy *wiphy;
2691 	const char *rate_control_algorithm;
2692 	void *priv;
2693 	unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)];
2694 	unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
2695 	unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
2696 	int vif_data_size;
2697 	int sta_data_size;
2698 	int chanctx_data_size;
2699 	int txq_data_size;
2700 	u16 queues;
2701 	u16 max_listen_interval;
2702 	s8 max_signal;
2703 	u8 max_rates;
2704 	u8 max_report_rates;
2705 	u8 max_rate_tries;
2706 	u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2707 	u16 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
2708 	u8 max_tx_fragments;
2709 	u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
2710 	u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
2711 	u16 radiotap_vht_details;
2712 	struct {
2713 		int units_pos;
2714 		s16 accuracy;
2715 	} radiotap_timestamp;
2716 	netdev_features_t netdev_features;
2717 	u8 uapsd_queues;
2718 	u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
2719 	u8 n_cipher_schemes;
2720 	const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes;
2721 	u8 max_nan_de_entries;
2722 	u8 tx_sk_pacing_shift;
2723 	u8 weight_multiplier;
2724 	u32 max_mtu;
2725 	const s8 *tx_power_levels;
2726 	u8 max_txpwr_levels_idx;
2727 };
2728 
2729 static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2730 				       enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2731 {
2732 	return test_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2733 }
2734 #define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg)	_ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2735 
2736 static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2737 				     enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2738 {
2739 	return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2740 }
2741 #define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg)	_ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2742 
2743 /**
2744  * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
2745  *
2746  * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
2747  * @req: cfg80211 request.
2748  */
2749 struct ieee80211_scan_request {
2750 	struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
2751 
2752 	/* Keep last */
2753 	struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
2754 };
2755 
2756 /**
2757  * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
2758  *
2759  * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
2760  * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
2761  * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
2762  * @status: channel-switch response status
2763  * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
2764  * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2765  * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2766  * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
2767  * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
2768  */
2769 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
2770 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2771 	struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
2772 	u8 action_code;
2773 	u32 status;
2774 	u32 timestamp;
2775 	u16 switch_time;
2776 	u16 switch_timeout;
2777 	struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
2778 	u32 ch_sw_tm_ie;
2779 };
2780 
2781 /**
2782  * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
2783  *
2784  * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
2785  *
2786  * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
2787  * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
2788  * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
2789  * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
2790  * is already used internally by mac80211.
2791  *
2792  * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
2793  */
2794 struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
2795 
2796 /**
2797  * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
2798  *
2799  * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
2800  * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
2801  */
2802 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
2803 {
2804 	set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
2805 }
2806 
2807 /**
2808  * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
2809  *
2810  * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
2811  * @addr: the address to set
2812  */
2813 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr)
2814 {
2815 	memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
2816 }
2817 
2818 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2819 ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2820 		      const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2821 {
2822 	if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
2823 		return NULL;
2824 	return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
2825 }
2826 
2827 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2828 ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2829 			   const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2830 {
2831 	if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
2832 		return NULL;
2833 	return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
2834 }
2835 
2836 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2837 ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2838 			     const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
2839 {
2840 	if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
2841 		return NULL;
2842 	return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
2843 }
2844 
2845 /**
2846  * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
2847  * @hw: the hardware
2848  * @skb: the skb
2849  *
2850  * Free a transmit skb. Use this function when some failure
2851  * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
2852  */
2853 void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
2854 
2855 /**
2856  * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
2857  *
2858  * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
2859  * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
2860  *
2861  * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
2862  * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
2863  * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
2864  * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
2865  * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
2866  * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
2867  * VLANs are configured for an access point.
2868  *
2869  * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
2870  * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
2871  * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
2872  *
2873  * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
2874  * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
2875  * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
2876  * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
2877  *
2878  * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is
2879  * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if
2880  * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the
2881  * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software.
2882  *
2883  * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
2884  *
2885  * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
2886  * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
2887  * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
2888  * based on the receive flags.
2889  *
2890  * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
2891  * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
2892  * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
2893  * keys.
2894  *
2895  * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
2896  * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
2897  * handler.
2898  * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
2899  * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
2900  * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
2901  * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
2902  * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
2903  * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
2904  *
2905  * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
2906  * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
2907  * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
2908  *
2909  * Mac80211 drivers should set the @NL80211_EXT_FEATURE_CAN_REPLACE_PTK0 flag
2910  * when they are able to replace in-use PTK keys according to the following
2911  * requirements:
2912  * 1) They do not hand over frames decrypted with the old key to mac80211
2913       once the call to set_key() with command %DISABLE_KEY has been completed,
2914    2) either drop or continue to use the old key for any outgoing frames queued
2915       at the time of the key deletion (including re-transmits),
2916    3) never send out a frame queued prior to the set_key() %SET_KEY command
2917       encrypted with the new key when also needing
2918       @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV and
2919    4) never send out a frame unencrypted when it should be encrypted.
2920    Mac80211 will not queue any new frames for a deleted key to the driver.
2921  */
2922 
2923 /**
2924  * DOC: Powersave support
2925  *
2926  * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
2927  *
2928  * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
2929  * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
2930  * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
2931  * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
2932  * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
2933  * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
2934  * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
2935  * it finds traffic directed to it.
2936  *
2937  * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
2938  * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
2939  * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
2940  * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
2941  * back to sleep at appropriate times.
2942  *
2943  * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
2944  * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
2945  * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
2946  *
2947  * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
2948  * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
2949  * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
2950  * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
2951  * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
2952  * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
2953  * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
2954  *
2955  * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
2956  * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
2957  * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
2958  * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
2959  * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
2960  * periods.
2961  *
2962  * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
2963  * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
2964  * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
2965  * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
2966  * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
2967  * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
2968  * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
2969  * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
2970  * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
2971  * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
2972  *
2973  * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
2974  * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
2975  * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
2976  * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
2977  * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
2978  * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
2979  *
2980  * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
2981  * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
2982  */
2983 
2984 /**
2985  * DOC: Beacon filter support
2986  *
2987  * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
2988  * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
2989  * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
2990  * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
2991  * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
2992  * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
2993  * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
2994  *
2995  * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
2996  * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
2997  * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
2998  * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
2999  * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
3000  *
3001  * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
3002  * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
3003  * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
3004  * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
3005  *
3006  * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
3007  * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
3008  * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
3009  * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
3010  *
3011  *  - a list of information element IDs
3012  *  - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
3013  *
3014  * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
3015  * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
3016  * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
3017  * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
3018  * vendor information elements.
3019  *
3020  * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
3021  * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
3022  *
3023  * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
3024  * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
3025  * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
3026  * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
3027  * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
3028  * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
3029  *
3030  *
3031  * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
3032  * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
3033  * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
3034  * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
3035  * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
3036  * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
3037  * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
3038  * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
3039  *
3040  * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
3041  * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
3042  * signal strength threshold checking.
3043  */
3044 
3045 /**
3046  * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
3047  *
3048  * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
3049  * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
3050  * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
3051  * "11.2.3 SM power save".
3052  *
3053  * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
3054  * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
3055  * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
3056  * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
3057  * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
3058  * hardware flags.
3059  *
3060  * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
3061  * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
3062  * turned off otherwise.
3063  *
3064  * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
3065  * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
3066  * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
3067  * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
3068  */
3069 
3070 /**
3071  * DOC: Frame filtering
3072  *
3073  * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
3074  * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
3075  * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
3076  * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
3077  * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
3078  *
3079  * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
3080  * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
3081  * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
3082  *
3083  * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
3084  * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
3085  * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
3086  * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
3087  * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
3088  * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
3089  * @total_flags with the new flag states.
3090  *
3091  * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
3092  * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
3093  * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
3094  * or dropped.
3095  *
3096  * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
3097  * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
3098  * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
3099  * the flag, but not clear it.
3100  * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
3101  * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
3102  * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
3103  * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
3104  * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
3105  * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
3106  * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
3107  * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
3108  */
3109 
3110 /**
3111  * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
3112  *
3113  * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
3114  * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
3115  * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
3116  *
3117  * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
3118  * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
3119  * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
3120  * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
3121  * the driver code.
3122  *
3123  * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
3124  * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
3125  * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
3126  * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
3127  * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
3128  * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
3129  * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
3130  *
3131  * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
3132  * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
3133  * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
3134  * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
3135  * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
3136  * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
3137  * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
3138  * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
3139  * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
3140  * @sta_notify callback.
3141  *
3142  * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
3143  * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
3144  * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
3145  * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
3146  * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
3147  * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
3148  * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
3149  * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
3150  * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
3151  * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
3152  * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
3153  * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
3154  * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
3155  * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
3156  *
3157  * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
3158  * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
3159  *
3160  * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
3161  * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
3162  * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
3163  * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
3164  * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
3165  * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
3166  * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
3167  * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
3168  * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
3169  * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
3170  * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
3171  *
3172  * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
3173  * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
3174  * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
3175  * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
3176  * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
3177  * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
3178  * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
3179  * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
3180  * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
3181  * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
3182  * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
3183  * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
3184  * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
3185  * buffers for those TIDs contain.
3186  *
3187  * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
3188  * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
3189  * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
3190  * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
3191  * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
3192  * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
3193  * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
3194  *
3195  * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
3196  * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
3197  * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
3198  * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
3199  * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
3200  *
3201  * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
3202  * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
3203  * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
3204  * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
3205  */
3206 
3207 /**
3208  * DOC: HW queue control
3209  *
3210  * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
3211  * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
3212  * was problematic for a few reasons:
3213  * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
3214  * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
3215  * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
3216  *
3217  * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
3218  * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
3219  * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
3220  *
3221  * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
3222  * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
3223  * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
3224  * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
3225  * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
3226  * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
3227  * the hardware queue.
3228  * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
3229  * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
3230  *
3231  * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
3232  * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
3233  * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
3234  * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
3235  * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
3236  *
3237  * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
3238  * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
3239  * after-DTIM queue for AP:   8
3240  * off-channel queue:         9
3241  *
3242  * It would then set up the hardware like this:
3243  *   hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
3244  *
3245  * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
3246  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
3247  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
3248  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
3249  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
3250  *   vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
3251  * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
3252  *
3253  * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
3254  * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
3255  *
3256  * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
3257  * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
3258  * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
3259  * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
3260  */
3261 
3262 /**
3263  * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
3264  *
3265  * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
3266  * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
3267  * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
3268  * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
3269  *
3270  * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
3271  *	by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
3272  *	multicast address.
3273  *
3274  * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
3275  *	%RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
3276  *
3277  * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
3278  *	the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
3279  *
3280  * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
3281  *	to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
3282  *	by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
3283  *	mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
3284  *	honour this flag if possible.
3285  *
3286  * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this
3287  *	station
3288  *
3289  * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
3290  *
3291  * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames
3292  *
3293  * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
3294  *
3295  * @FIF_MCAST_ACTION: pass multicast Action frames
3296  */
3297 enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
3298 	FIF_ALLMULTI		= 1<<1,
3299 	FIF_FCSFAIL		= 1<<2,
3300 	FIF_PLCPFAIL		= 1<<3,
3301 	FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC	= 1<<4,
3302 	FIF_CONTROL		= 1<<5,
3303 	FIF_OTHER_BSS		= 1<<6,
3304 	FIF_PSPOLL		= 1<<7,
3305 	FIF_PROBE_REQ		= 1<<8,
3306 	FIF_MCAST_ACTION	= 1<<9,
3307 };
3308 
3309 /**
3310  * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
3311  *
3312  * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
3313  * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
3314  *
3315  * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
3316  * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
3317  * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
3318  * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
3319  *
3320  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
3321  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
3322  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation, the driver must either
3323  *	call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() or
3324  *	call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() with status
3325  *	%IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA to delay addba after
3326  *	ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe is called, or just return the special
3327  *	status %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE.
3328  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
3329  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
3330  *	queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
3331  *	driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
3332  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
3333  *	called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
3334  *	ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
3335  *	session is gone and removes the station.
3336  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
3337  *	but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
3338  *	now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
3339  *	should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
3340  */
3341 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
3342 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
3343 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
3344 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
3345 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
3346 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
3347 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
3348 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
3349 };
3350 
3351 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE 1
3352 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA 2
3353 
3354 /**
3355  * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters
3356  *
3357  * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
3358  * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session
3359  * @tid: tid of the BA session
3360  * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When
3361  *	action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the
3362  *	actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here.
3363  * @buf_size: reorder buffer size  (number of subframes). Valid only when the
3364  *	action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or
3365  *	%IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3366  * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU.
3367  *	valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3368  * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to
3369  *	%IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START
3370  */
3371 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params {
3372 	enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action;
3373 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
3374 	u16 tid;
3375 	u16 ssn;
3376 	u16 buf_size;
3377 	bool amsdu;
3378 	u16 timeout;
3379 };
3380 
3381 /**
3382  * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
3383  * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
3384  * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
3385  *	frame received on trigger-enabled AC
3386  */
3387 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
3388 	IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
3389 	IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
3390 };
3391 
3392 /**
3393  * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
3394  *
3395  * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
3396  *	to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
3397  *	information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
3398  *	flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
3399  * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
3400  * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
3401  *	changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
3402  *	the peer.
3403  * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
3404  *	by the peer
3405  */
3406 enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
3407 	IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED		= BIT(0),
3408 	IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED	= BIT(1),
3409 	IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED	= BIT(2),
3410 	IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED	= BIT(3),
3411 };
3412 
3413 /**
3414  * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
3415  *
3416  * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
3417  * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
3418  * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vice versa).
3419  * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
3420  * operations compared to other operations/flows.
3421  *
3422  * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
3423  * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
3424  *	for sending management frames offchannel.
3425  */
3426 enum ieee80211_roc_type {
3427 	IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
3428 	IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
3429 };
3430 
3431 /**
3432  * enum ieee80211_reconfig_type - reconfig type
3433  *
3434  * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
3435  * reconfiguration type was completed.
3436  *
3437  * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
3438  *	(also due to resume() callback returning 1)
3439  * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
3440  *	of wowlan configuration)
3441  */
3442 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
3443 	IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
3444 	IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
3445 };
3446 
3447 /**
3448  * struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info - prepare TX information
3449  * @duration: if non-zero, hint about the required duration,
3450  *	only used with the mgd_prepare_tx() method.
3451  * @subtype: frame subtype (auth, (re)assoc, deauth, disassoc)
3452  * @success: whether the frame exchange was successful, only
3453  *	used with the mgd_complete_tx() method, and then only
3454  *	valid for auth and (re)assoc.
3455  */
3456 struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info {
3457 	u16 duration;
3458 	u16 subtype;
3459 	u8 success:1;
3460 };
3461 
3462 /**
3463  * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
3464  *
3465  * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
3466  * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
3467  * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
3468  *
3469  * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
3470  *	skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
3471  *	The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
3472  *	configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
3473  *	preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
3474  *	Must be atomic.
3475  *
3476  * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
3477  *	is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
3478  *	frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
3479  *	Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
3480  *	or zero.
3481  *	When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
3482  *	to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
3483  *	is added.
3484  *	Must be implemented and can sleep.
3485  *
3486  * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
3487  *	is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
3488  *	it must turn off frame reception.)
3489  *	May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
3490  *	an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
3491  *	you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
3492  *	Must be implemented and can sleep.
3493  *
3494  * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
3495  *	stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
3496  *	ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
3497  *	configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
3498  *	reconfigured at resume time.
3499  *	The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
3500  *	wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
3501  *	supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
3502  *	must return 1 from this function.
3503  *
3504  * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
3505  *	now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
3506  *	functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
3507  *	to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
3508  *	will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
3509  *
3510  * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
3511  *	modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
3512  *	supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
3513  *	in suspend().
3514  *
3515  * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
3516  *	enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
3517  *	and @stop must be implemented.
3518  *	The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
3519  *	the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
3520  *	interface is given in the conf parameter.
3521  *	The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
3522  *	negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
3523  *	Must be implemented and can sleep.
3524  *
3525  * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
3526  *	is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
3527  *	switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
3528  *	Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
3529  *	found by the interface iteration callbacks.
3530  *
3531  * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
3532  *	The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
3533  *	and no monitor interfaces are present.
3534  *	When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
3535  *	must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
3536  *	the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
3537  *	MAC address of the device going away.
3538  *	Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
3539  *
3540  * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
3541  *	function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
3542  *	This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
3543  *	if it does. The callback can sleep.
3544  *
3545  * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
3546  *	parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
3547  *	level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
3548  *	This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
3549  *	for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
3550  *	of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
3551  *	can sleep.
3552  *
3553  * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
3554  *	This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
3555  *	to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
3556  *
3557  * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
3558  *	See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
3559  *	This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
3560  *
3561  * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter.
3562  *	This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames
3563  *	should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination
3564  *	of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates
3565  *	which flags are changed.
3566  *	This callback can sleep.
3567  *
3568  * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
3569  * 	must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
3570  *
3571  * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3572  *	This callback is only called between add_interface and
3573  *	remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
3574  *	is enabled.
3575  *	Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
3576  *	The callback can sleep.
3577  *
3578  * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3579  * 	This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
3580  * 	which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
3581  *	The callback must be atomic.
3582  *
3583  * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
3584  *	host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
3585  *	necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
3586  *	After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
3587  *	userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
3588  *
3589  * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
3590  *	WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
3591  *	offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
3592  *
3593  * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
3594  *	the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
3595  *	configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
3596  *	registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
3597  *	that power save is disabled.
3598  *	The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
3599  *	entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
3600  *	at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
3601  *	(extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
3602  *	When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
3603  *	note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
3604  *	any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
3605  *	This callback is also allowed to return the special return value 1,
3606  *	this indicates that hardware scan isn't desirable right now and a
3607  *	software scan should be done instead. A driver wishing to use this
3608  *	capability must ensure its (hardware) scan capabilities aren't
3609  *	advertised as more capable than mac80211's software scan is.
3610  *	The callback can sleep.
3611  *
3612  * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
3613  *	The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
3614  *	but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
3615  *	ieee80211_scan_completed().
3616  *	This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
3617  *	scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
3618  *	The callback can sleep.
3619  *
3620  * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
3621  *	specific intervals.  The driver must call the
3622  *	ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
3623  *	This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
3624  *
3625  * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
3626  *	In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
3627  *
3628  * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
3629  *	is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
3630  *	The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
3631  *	the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
3632  *	can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
3633  *
3634  * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
3635  *	software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
3636  *	this notification.
3637  *	The callback can sleep.
3638  *
3639  * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
3640  * 	Returns zero if statistics are available.
3641  *	The callback can sleep.
3642  *
3643  * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does
3644  *	IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the
3645  *	IV/PN for the given key from hardware.
3646  *	The callback must be atomic.
3647  *
3648  * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
3649  *	if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the
3650  *	stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG
3651  *	should be set as well.
3652  *	The callback can sleep.
3653  *
3654  * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
3655  *	The callback can sleep.
3656  *
3657  * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
3658  *	AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
3659  *
3660  * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
3661  *	station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
3662  *	returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
3663  *	no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
3664  *	the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3665  *	This callback can sleep.
3666  *
3667  * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
3668  *	when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
3669  *	should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This
3670  *	callback can sleep.
3671  *
3672  * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
3673  *	associated station, AP,  IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
3674  *	in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
3675  *	%IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
3676  *
3677  * @sta_set_txpwr: Configure the station tx power. This callback set the tx
3678  *	power for the station.
3679  *	This callback can sleep.
3680  *
3681  * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
3682  *	station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
3683  *	This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
3684  *	It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
3685  *	up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
3686  *	isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
3687  *	period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
3688  *	See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3689  *	The callback can sleep.
3690  *
3691  * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
3692  *	synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
3693  *	pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
3694  *	the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
3695  *	in @sta_state.
3696  *	The callback can sleep.
3697  *
3698  * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
3699  *	used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
3700  *	from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
3701  *	in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
3702  *	uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
3703  *	otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
3704  *	Must be atomic.
3705  * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
3706  *	is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
3707  *	the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
3708  *
3709  * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon
3710  *	filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so
3711  *	let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of
3712  *	the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not
3713  *	all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible.
3714  *	Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211.
3715  *	The callback can sleep.
3716  *
3717  * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
3718  *	bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
3719  *	Returns a negative error code on failure.
3720  *	The callback can sleep.
3721  *
3722  * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
3723  *	this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
3724  *	required function.
3725  *	The callback can sleep.
3726  *
3727  * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
3728  *	Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
3729  *	required function.
3730  *	The callback can sleep.
3731  *
3732  * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the
3733  *	firmware/hardware.  Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between
3734  *	calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up
3735  *	as TSF delay. Is not a required function.
3736  *	The callback can sleep.
3737  *
3738  * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
3739  *	with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
3740  *	function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
3741  *	TSF synchronization.
3742  *	The callback can sleep.
3743  *
3744  * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
3745  *	This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
3746  *	used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
3747  *	Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
3748  *	The callback can sleep.
3749  *
3750  * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
3751  *
3752  * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
3753  *	need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
3754  *	and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
3755  *	The callback can sleep.
3756  *
3757  * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
3758  *	in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
3759  *	accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
3760  *	estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
3761  *	coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
3762  *
3763  * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
3764  *	be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
3765  * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
3766  *
3767  * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
3768  *	that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
3769  *	of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
3770  *	use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
3771  *	If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
3772  *	Note that vif can be NULL.
3773  *	The callback can sleep.
3774  *
3775  * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
3776  *	switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
3777  *	callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
3778  *	completion of the channel switch.
3779  *
3780  * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
3781  *	Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
3782  *	reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
3783  *	(also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
3784  *
3785  * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
3786  *
3787  * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
3788  *	call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
3789  *	that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
3790  *	offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
3791  *	normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
3792  *	duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
3793  *	ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
3794  *	Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
3795  *	must be accepted in this case.
3796  *	This callback may sleep.
3797  * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
3798  *	aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
3799  *
3800  * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
3801  *
3802  * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
3803  *
3804  * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
3805  *	queues before entering power save.
3806  *
3807  * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
3808  *	when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
3809  *	The callback can sleep.
3810  * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See
3811  *	&enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types.
3812  *	The callback must be atomic.
3813  *
3814  * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
3815  *	parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
3816  *	sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
3817  *	to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
3818  *	Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
3819  *	if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
3820  *	the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
3821  *	the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
3822  *	more-data bit must always be set.
3823  *	The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
3824  *	from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
3825  *	In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
3826  *	@num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
3827  *	this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3828  *	on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
3829  *	period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
3830  *	responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
3831  *	In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
3832  *	bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
3833  *	at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
3834  *	setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
3835  *	service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
3836  *	on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
3837  *	ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
3838  *	This callback must be atomic.
3839  * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
3840  *	to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
3841  *	via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
3842  *	released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
3843  *	and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
3844  *	frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
3845  *	them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3846  *	on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
3847  *	bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
3848  *	ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
3849  *	The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
3850  *	frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
3851  *	This callback must be atomic.
3852  *
3853  * @get_et_sset_count:  Ethtool API to get string-set count.
3854  *
3855  * @get_et_stats:  Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
3856  *
3857  * @get_et_strings:  Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
3858  *	and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
3859  *
3860  * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
3861  *	before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
3862  *	bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
3863  *	yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
3864  *	transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
3865  *	powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
3866  *	management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
3867  *	driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
3868  *	and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
3869  *	For drivers that set %IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP, mac80211
3870  *	would also call this function before transmitting a deauthentication
3871  *	frame in case that no beacon was heard from the AP/P2P GO.
3872  *	The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
3873  *	mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
3874  *	Additional information is passed in the &struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info
3875  *	data. If duration there is greater than zero, mac80211 hints to the
3876  *	driver the duration for which the operation is requested.
3877  *	The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
3878  * @mgd_complete_tx: Notify the driver that the response frame for a previously
3879  *	transmitted frame announced with @mgd_prepare_tx was received, the data
3880  *	is filled similarly to @mgd_prepare_tx though the duration is not used.
3881  *
3882  * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
3883  *	a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
3884  *	channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
3885  *	setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
3886  *	mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
3887  *	discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
3888  *	2 * (DTIM period).
3889  *	The callback is optional and can sleep.
3890  *
3891  * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
3892  *	This callback may sleep.
3893  * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
3894  *	This callback may sleep.
3895  * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
3896  *	may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
3897  *	channel context with different settings
3898  *	This callback may sleep.
3899  * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
3900  *	to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
3901  *	This callback may sleep.
3902  * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
3903  *	unbound from vif.
3904  *	This callback may sleep.
3905  * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
3906  *	another, as specified in the list of
3907  *	@ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
3908  *	to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
3909  *	This callback may sleep.
3910  *
3911  * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
3912  *	information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
3913  *	context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
3914  *	software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
3915  *	just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
3916  *	disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
3917  * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
3918  *
3919  * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
3920  *	during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
3921  *	This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
3922  *	indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
3923  *	This callback may sleep.
3924  *
3925  * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
3926  *	Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
3927  *	This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
3928  *
3929  * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
3930  *	Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
3931  *	function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
3932  *	decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
3933  *	ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
3934  *	get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
3935  *	1 using ieee80211_beacon_counter_is_complete() after the beacon has been
3936  *	transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
3937  *	If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
3938  *	since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
3939  * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3940  *	before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
3941  *	gets a CSA or a userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
3942  *	the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
3943  * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3944  *	after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
3945  *	driver to go back to a normal configuration.
3946  * @abort_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3947  *	when channel switch procedure was completed, allowing the
3948  *	driver to go back to a normal configuration.
3949  * @channel_switch_rx_beacon: This is an optional callback that is called
3950  *	when channel switch procedure is in progress and additional beacon with
3951  *	CSA IE was received, allowing driver to track changes in count.
3952  * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
3953  *	information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
3954  *	channel context is bound before this is called.
3955  * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
3956  *
3957  * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
3958  *	specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
3959  *	if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
3960  *
3961  * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
3962  *	and hardware limits.
3963  *
3964  * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
3965  *	is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
3966  *	and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
3967  *	driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
3968  *	the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
3969  *	The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
3970  *	optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
3971  * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
3972  *	peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
3973  * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
3974  *	response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
3975  *	parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
3976  *	an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
3977  *	response template is provided, together with the location of the
3978  *	switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
3979  *	the function call.
3980  *
3981  * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue.
3982  * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a
3983  *	synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues
3984  *	pending frames that were received prior to the control path action
3985  *	currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet.
3986  *
3987  * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one.
3988  * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster.
3989  * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf
3990  *	contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters
3991  *	are changed with respect to the last NAN config.
3992  *	The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since
3993  *	some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the
3994  *	changed parameters.
3995  * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in
3996  *	cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of
3997  *	this call.
3998  * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call
3999  *	ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with
4000  *	NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal.
4001  * @can_aggregate_in_amsdu: Called in order to determine if HW supports
4002  *	aggregating two specific frames in the same A-MSDU. The relation
4003  *	between the skbs should be symmetric and transitive. Note that while
4004  *	skb is always a real frame, head may or may not be an A-MSDU.
4005  * @get_ftm_responder_stats: Retrieve FTM responder statistics, if available.
4006  *	Statistics should be cumulative, currently no way to reset is provided.
4007  *
4008  * @start_pmsr: start peer measurement (e.g. FTM) (this call can sleep)
4009  * @abort_pmsr: abort peer measurement (this call can sleep)
4010  * @set_tid_config: Apply TID specific configurations. This callback may sleep.
4011  * @reset_tid_config: Reset TID specific configuration for the peer.
4012  *	This callback may sleep.
4013  * @update_vif_offload: Update virtual interface offload flags
4014  *	This callback may sleep.
4015  * @sta_set_4addr: Called to notify the driver when a station starts/stops using
4016  *	4-address mode
4017  * @set_sar_specs: Update the SAR (TX power) settings.
4018  * @sta_set_decap_offload: Called to notify the driver when a station is allowed
4019  *	to use rx decapsulation offload
4020  * @add_twt_setup: Update hw with TWT agreement parameters received from the peer.
4021  *	This callback allows the hw to check if requested parameters
4022  *	are supported and if there is enough room for a new agreement.
4023  *	The hw is expected to set agreement result in the req_type field of
4024  *	twt structure.
4025  * @twt_teardown_request: Update the hw with TWT teardown request received
4026  *	from the peer.
4027  * @set_radar_background: Configure dedicated offchannel chain available for
4028  *	radar/CAC detection on some hw. This chain can't be used to transmit
4029  *	or receive frames and it is bounded to a running wdev.
4030  *	Background radar/CAC detection allows to avoid the CAC downtime
4031  *	switching to a different channel during CAC detection on the selected
4032  *	radar channel.
4033  *	The caller is expected to set chandef pointer to NULL in order to
4034  *	disable background CAC/radar detection.
4035  * @net_fill_forward_path: Called from .ndo_fill_forward_path in order to
4036  *	resolve a path for hardware flow offloading
4037  */
4038 struct ieee80211_ops {
4039 	void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4040 		   struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
4041 		   struct sk_buff *skb);
4042 	int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4043 	void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4044 #ifdef CONFIG_PM
4045 	int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
4046 	int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4047 	void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
4048 #endif
4049 	int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4050 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4051 	int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4052 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4053 				enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
4054 	void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4055 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4056 	int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
4057 	void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4058 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4059 				 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
4060 				 u32 changed);
4061 
4062 	int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4063 	void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4064 
4065 	u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4066 				 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
4067 	void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4068 				 unsigned int changed_flags,
4069 				 unsigned int *total_flags,
4070 				 u64 multicast);
4071 	void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4072 				    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4073 				    unsigned int filter_flags,
4074 				    unsigned int changed_flags);
4075 	int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4076 		       bool set);
4077 	int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
4078 		       struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4079 		       struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
4080 	void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4081 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4082 				struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
4083 				struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4084 				u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
4085 	void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4086 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4087 			       struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
4088 	void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4089 					struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
4090 	int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4091 		       struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
4092 	void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4093 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4094 	int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4095 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4096 				struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
4097 				struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
4098 	int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4099 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4100 	void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4101 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4102 			      const u8 *mac_addr);
4103 	void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4104 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4105 	int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4106 			 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
4107 	void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4108 			    struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
4109 			    struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4110 	int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
4111 	int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
4112 	int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4113 		       struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4114 	int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4115 			  struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4116 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
4117 	void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4118 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4119 				struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4120 				struct dentry *dir);
4121 #endif
4122 	void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4123 			enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4124 	int (*sta_set_txpwr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4125 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4126 			     struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4127 	int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4128 			 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4129 			 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
4130 			 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
4131 	void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4132 				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4133 				   struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4134 	void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4135 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4136 			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4137 			      u32 changed);
4138 	void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4139 				    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4140 				    struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4141 	void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4142 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4143 			       struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4144 			       struct station_info *sinfo);
4145 	int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4146 		       struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
4147 		       const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
4148 	u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4149 	void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4150 			u64 tsf);
4151 	void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4152 			   s64 offset);
4153 	void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4154 	int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4155 
4156 	/**
4157 	 * @ampdu_action:
4158 	 * Perform a certain A-MPDU action.
4159 	 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
4160 	 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
4161 	 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
4162 	 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver
4163 	 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size
4164 	 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
4165 	 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
4166 	 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
4167 	 *
4168 	 * - ``TX: 1.....7``
4169 	 * - ``RX:  2....7`` (lost frame #1)
4170 	 * - ``TX:        8..1...``
4171 	 *
4172 	 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
4173 	 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
4174 	 *
4175 	 * - ``TX:        1   or``
4176 	 * - ``TX:        18  or``
4177 	 * - ``TX:        81``
4178 	 *
4179 	 * Even ``189`` would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
4180 	 *
4181 	 * Returns a negative error code on failure. The driver may return
4182 	 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE for %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START
4183 	 * if the session can start immediately.
4184 	 *
4185 	 * The callback can sleep.
4186 	 */
4187 	int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4188 			    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4189 			    struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params);
4190 	int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
4191 		struct survey_info *survey);
4192 	void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4193 	void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
4194 #ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
4195 	int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4196 			    void *data, int len);
4197 	int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
4198 			     struct netlink_callback *cb,
4199 			     void *data, int len);
4200 #endif
4201 	void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4202 		      u32 queues, bool drop);
4203 	void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4204 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4205 			       struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4206 	int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
4207 	int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
4208 
4209 	int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4210 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4211 				 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
4212 				 int duration,
4213 				 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
4214 	int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4215 					struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4216 	int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
4217 	void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4218 			      u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
4219 	bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4220 	int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4221 				const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
4222 	void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4223 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4224 			       const struct ieee80211_event *event);
4225 
4226 	void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4227 				      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4228 				      u16 tids, int num_frames,
4229 				      enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
4230 				      bool more_data);
4231 	void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4232 					struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4233 					u16 tids, int num_frames,
4234 					enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
4235 					bool more_data);
4236 
4237 	int	(*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4238 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
4239 	void	(*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4240 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4241 				struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
4242 	void	(*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4243 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4244 				  u32 sset, u8 *data);
4245 
4246 	void	(*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4247 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4248 				  struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info *info);
4249 	void	(*mgd_complete_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4250 				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4251 				   struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info *info);
4252 
4253 	void	(*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4254 					     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4255 
4256 	int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4257 			   struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4258 	void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4259 			       struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4260 	void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4261 			       struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
4262 			       u32 changed);
4263 	int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4264 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4265 				  struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4266 	void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4267 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4268 				     struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4269 	int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4270 				  struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
4271 				  int n_vifs,
4272 				  enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
4273 
4274 	void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4275 				  enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
4276 
4277 #if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
4278 	void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4279 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4280 				 struct inet6_dev *idev);
4281 #endif
4282 	void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4283 				      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4284 				      struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
4285 	int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4286 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4287 				  struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4288 
4289 	int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4290 				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4291 	void (*abort_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4292 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4293 	void (*channel_switch_rx_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4294 					 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4295 					 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4296 
4297 	int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4298 	void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4299 	u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4300 				       struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4301 	int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4302 			   int *dbm);
4303 
4304 	int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4305 				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4306 				   struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
4307 				   struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
4308 				   struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
4309 	void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4310 					   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4311 					   struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4312 	void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4313 					 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4314 					 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
4315 
4316 	void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4317 			      struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
4318 	void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4319 
4320 	int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4321 			 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4322 			 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf);
4323 	int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4324 			struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4325 	int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4326 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4327 			       struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes);
4328 	int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4329 			    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4330 			    const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func);
4331 	void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4332 			    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4333 			    u8 instance_id);
4334 	bool (*can_aggregate_in_amsdu)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4335 				       struct sk_buff *head,
4336 				       struct sk_buff *skb);
4337 	int (*get_ftm_responder_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4338 				       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4339 				       struct cfg80211_ftm_responder_stats *ftm_stats);
4340 	int (*start_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4341 			  struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4342 	void (*abort_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4343 			   struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4344 	int (*set_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4345 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4346 			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4347 			      struct cfg80211_tid_config *tid_conf);
4348 	int (*reset_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4349 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4350 				struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tids);
4351 	void (*update_vif_offload)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4352 				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4353 	void (*sta_set_4addr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4354 			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool enabled);
4355 	int (*set_sar_specs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4356 			     const struct cfg80211_sar_specs *sar);
4357 	void (*sta_set_decap_offload)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4358 				      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4359 				      struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool enabled);
4360 	void (*add_twt_setup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4361 			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4362 			      struct ieee80211_twt_setup *twt);
4363 	void (*twt_teardown_request)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4364 				     struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 flowid);
4365 	int (*set_radar_background)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4366 				    struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
4367 	int (*net_fill_forward_path)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4368 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4369 				     struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4370 				     struct net_device_path_ctx *ctx,
4371 				     struct net_device_path *path);
4372 };
4373 
4374 /**
4375  * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
4376  *
4377  * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
4378  * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
4379  * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
4380  * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4381  * @priv_data_len.
4382  *
4383  * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4384  * @ops: callbacks for this device
4385  * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
4386  *	NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
4387  *
4388  * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4389  */
4390 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
4391 					   const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
4392 					   const char *requested_name);
4393 
4394 /**
4395  * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
4396  *
4397  * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
4398  * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
4399  * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
4400  * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4401  * @priv_data_len.
4402  *
4403  * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4404  * @ops: callbacks for this device
4405  *
4406  * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4407  */
4408 static inline
4409 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
4410 					const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
4411 {
4412 	return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
4413 }
4414 
4415 /**
4416  * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
4417  *
4418  * You must call this function before any other functions in
4419  * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
4420  * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
4421  *
4422  * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4423  *
4424  * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
4425  */
4426 int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4427 
4428 /**
4429  * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
4430  * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
4431  * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
4432  *	(full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
4433  */
4434 struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
4435 	int throughput;
4436 	int blink_time;
4437 };
4438 
4439 /**
4440  * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
4441  * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
4442  * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
4443  * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
4444  *	interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
4445  */
4446 enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
4447 	IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO		= BIT(0),
4448 	IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK		= BIT(1),
4449 	IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED	= BIT(2),
4450 };
4451 
4452 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4453 const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4454 const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4455 const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4456 const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4457 const char *
4458 __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4459 				   unsigned int flags,
4460 				   const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4461 				   unsigned int blink_table_len);
4462 #endif
4463 /**
4464  * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
4465  *
4466  * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4467  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4468  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4469  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4470  *
4471  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4472  *
4473  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4474  */
4475 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4476 {
4477 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4478 	return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
4479 #else
4480 	return NULL;
4481 #endif
4482 }
4483 
4484 /**
4485  * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
4486  *
4487  * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4488  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4489  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4490  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4491  *
4492  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4493  *
4494  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4495  */
4496 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4497 {
4498 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4499 	return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
4500 #else
4501 	return NULL;
4502 #endif
4503 }
4504 
4505 /**
4506  * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
4507  *
4508  * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4509  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4510  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4511  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4512  *
4513  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4514  *
4515  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4516  */
4517 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4518 {
4519 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4520 	return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
4521 #else
4522 	return NULL;
4523 #endif
4524 }
4525 
4526 /**
4527  * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
4528  *
4529  * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4530  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4531  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4532  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4533  *
4534  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4535  *
4536  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4537  */
4538 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4539 {
4540 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4541 	return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
4542 #else
4543 	return NULL;
4544 #endif
4545 }
4546 
4547 /**
4548  * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
4549  * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
4550  * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
4551  * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
4552  * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
4553  *
4554  * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
4555  * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
4556  *
4557  * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
4558  */
4559 static inline const char *
4560 ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
4561 				 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4562 				 unsigned int blink_table_len)
4563 {
4564 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4565 	return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
4566 						  blink_table_len);
4567 #else
4568 	return NULL;
4569 #endif
4570 }
4571 
4572 /**
4573  * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
4574  *
4575  * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
4576  * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
4577  *
4578  * @hw: the hardware to unregister
4579  */
4580 void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4581 
4582 /**
4583  * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
4584  *
4585  * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
4586  * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
4587  * before calling this function.
4588  *
4589  * @hw: the hardware to free
4590  */
4591 void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4592 
4593 /**
4594  * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
4595  *
4596  * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
4597  * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
4598  * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
4599  * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
4600  * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
4601  * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
4602  *
4603  * @hw: the hardware to restart
4604  */
4605 void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4606 
4607 /**
4608  * ieee80211_rx_list - receive frame and store processed skbs in a list
4609  *
4610  * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4611  * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4612  * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4613  * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4614  * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4615  *
4616  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4617  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4618  * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4619  * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4620  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4621  *
4622  * This function must be called with BHs disabled and RCU read lock
4623  *
4624  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4625  * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
4626  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4627  * @list: the destination list
4628  */
4629 void ieee80211_rx_list(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4630 		       struct sk_buff *skb, struct list_head *list);
4631 
4632 /**
4633  * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context
4634  *
4635  * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4636  * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4637  * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4638  * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4639  * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4640  *
4641  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4642  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4643  * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4644  * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4645  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4646  *
4647  * This function must be called with BHs disabled.
4648  *
4649  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4650  * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
4651  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4652  * @napi: the NAPI context
4653  */
4654 void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4655 		       struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi);
4656 
4657 /**
4658  * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
4659  *
4660  * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4661  * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4662  * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4663  * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4664  * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4665  *
4666  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4667  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4668  * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4669  * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4670  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4671  *
4672  * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
4673  *
4674  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4675  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4676  */
4677 static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb)
4678 {
4679 	ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL);
4680 }
4681 
4682 /**
4683  * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
4684  *
4685  * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
4686  * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4687  *
4688  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
4689  * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
4690  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4691  *
4692  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4693  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4694  */
4695 void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
4696 
4697 /**
4698  * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
4699  *
4700  * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
4701  * (internally disables bottom halves).
4702  *
4703  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
4704  * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4705  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4706  *
4707  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4708  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4709  */
4710 static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4711 				   struct sk_buff *skb)
4712 {
4713 	local_bh_disable();
4714 	ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
4715 	local_bh_enable();
4716 }
4717 
4718 /**
4719  * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
4720  *
4721  * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
4722  * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
4723  * entering/leaving PS mode.
4724  *
4725  * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
4726  *
4727  * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
4728  * each other.
4729  *
4730  * @sta: currently connected sta
4731  * @start: start or stop PS
4732  *
4733  * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
4734  */
4735 int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
4736 
4737 /**
4738  * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
4739  *                                  (in process context)
4740  *
4741  * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
4742  * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
4743  * applies.
4744  *
4745  * @sta: currently connected sta
4746  * @start: start or stop PS
4747  *
4748  * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
4749  */
4750 static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4751 						  bool start)
4752 {
4753 	int ret;
4754 
4755 	local_bh_disable();
4756 	ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
4757 	local_bh_enable();
4758 
4759 	return ret;
4760 }
4761 
4762 /**
4763  * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received
4764  * @sta: currently connected station
4765  *
4766  * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4767  * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a
4768  * connected station was received.
4769  * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4770  * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must
4771  * be serialized.
4772  */
4773 void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4774 
4775 /**
4776  * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received
4777  * @sta: currently connected station
4778  * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame
4779  *
4780  * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4781  * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame
4782  * from a connected station was received.
4783  * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4784  * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be
4785  * serialized.
4786  * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown.
4787  * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC
4788  * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper
4789  * checks.
4790  */
4791 void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
4792 
4793 /*
4794  * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
4795  * This is enough for the radiotap header.
4796  */
4797 #define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM	ALIGN(14, 4)
4798 
4799 /**
4800  * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
4801  * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
4802  * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
4803  * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
4804  *
4805  * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
4806  * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
4807  * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
4808  *
4809  * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
4810  * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
4811  * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
4812  * call! Beware of the locking!)
4813  *
4814  * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
4815  * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
4816  * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
4817  * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
4818  * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
4819  * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
4820  *
4821  * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
4822  * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
4823  * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
4824  * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
4825  * use this API.
4826  */
4827 void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4828 				u8 tid, bool buffered);
4829 
4830 /**
4831  * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
4832  *
4833  * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
4834  * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
4835  * rate selection table for the station entry.
4836  *
4837  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4838  * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
4839  * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
4840  * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
4841  * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
4842  */
4843 void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4844 			    struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4845 			    struct sk_buff *skb,
4846 			    struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
4847 			    int max_rates);
4848 
4849 /**
4850  * ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput - set the expected tpt for a station
4851  *
4852  * Call this function to notify mac80211 about a change in expected throughput
4853  * to a station. A driver for a device that does rate control in firmware can
4854  * call this function when the expected throughput estimate towards a station
4855  * changes. The information is used to tune the CoDel AQM applied to traffic
4856  * going towards that station (which can otherwise be too aggressive and cause
4857  * slow stations to starve).
4858  *
4859  * @pubsta: the station to set throughput for.
4860  * @thr: the current expected throughput in kbps.
4861  */
4862 void ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4863 					   u32 thr);
4864 
4865 /**
4866  * ieee80211_tx_rate_update - transmit rate update callback
4867  *
4868  * Drivers should call this functions with a non-NULL pub sta
4869  * This function can be used in drivers that does not have provision
4870  * in updating the tx rate in data path.
4871  *
4872  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4873  * @pubsta: the station to update the tx rate for.
4874  * @info: tx status information
4875  */
4876 void ieee80211_tx_rate_update(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4877 			      struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4878 			      struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
4879 
4880 /**
4881  * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
4882  *
4883  * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
4884  * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
4885  * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
4886  *
4887  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4888  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
4889  * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
4890  * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4891  * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
4892  *
4893  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4894  * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4895  */
4896 void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4897 			 struct sk_buff *skb);
4898 
4899 /**
4900  * ieee80211_tx_status_ext - extended transmit status callback
4901  *
4902  * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4903  * in drivers that may want to provide extra information that does not
4904  * fit into &struct ieee80211_tx_info.
4905  *
4906  * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4907  * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4908  * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4909  *
4910  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4911  * @status: tx status information
4912  */
4913 void ieee80211_tx_status_ext(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4914 			     struct ieee80211_tx_status *status);
4915 
4916 /**
4917  * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb
4918  *
4919  * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4920  * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to
4921  * specific skbs.
4922  *
4923  * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4924  * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4925  * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4926  *
4927  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4928  * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent
4929  *	(NULL for multicast packets)
4930  * @info: tx status information
4931  */
4932 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4933 					     struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4934 					     struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
4935 {
4936 	struct ieee80211_tx_status status = {
4937 		.sta = sta,
4938 		.info = info,
4939 	};
4940 
4941 	ieee80211_tx_status_ext(hw, &status);
4942 }
4943 
4944 /**
4945  * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
4946  *
4947  * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
4948  *
4949  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4950  * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
4951  * for a single hardware.
4952  *
4953  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4954  * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4955  */
4956 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4957 					  struct sk_buff *skb)
4958 {
4959 	local_bh_disable();
4960 	ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
4961 	local_bh_enable();
4962 }
4963 
4964 /**
4965  * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
4966  *
4967  * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
4968  * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4969  *
4970  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4971  * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4972  *
4973  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4974  * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4975  */
4976 void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4977 				 struct sk_buff *skb);
4978 
4979 /**
4980  * ieee80211_tx_status_8023 - transmit status callback for 802.3 frame format
4981  *
4982  * Call this function for all transmitted data frames after their transmit
4983  * completion. This callback should only be called for data frames which
4984  * are using driver's (or hardware's) offload capability of encap/decap
4985  * 802.11 frames.
4986  *
4987  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4988  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other and all
4989  * calls in the same tx status family.
4990  *
4991  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4992  * @vif: the interface for which the frame was transmitted
4993  * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4994  */
4995 void ieee80211_tx_status_8023(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4996 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4997 			       struct sk_buff *skb);
4998 
4999 /**
5000  * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
5001  *
5002  * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
5003  * connected STA.
5004  *
5005  * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
5006  * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
5007  */
5008 void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
5009 
5010 #define IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM 2
5011 
5012 /**
5013  * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
5014  * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
5015  * @tim_length: size of TIM element
5016  * @cntdwn_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
5017  *	to countdown counters.  This array can contain zero values which
5018  *	should be ignored.
5019  * @mbssid_off: position of the multiple bssid element
5020  */
5021 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
5022 	u16 tim_offset;
5023 	u16 tim_length;
5024 
5025 	u16 cntdwn_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM];
5026 	u16 mbssid_off;
5027 };
5028 
5029 /**
5030  * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
5031  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5032  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5033  * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
5034  *	receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
5035  *
5036  * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
5037  * obtain the beacon template.
5038  *
5039  * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
5040  * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
5041  * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
5042  * applicable, the CSA count.
5043  *
5044  * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
5045  *
5046  * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
5047  */
5048 struct sk_buff *
5049 ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5050 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5051 			      struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs);
5052 
5053 /**
5054  * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
5055  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5056  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5057  * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
5058  *	Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
5059  * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
5060  *	(including the ID and length bytes!).
5061  *	Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
5062  *
5063  * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
5064  * obtain the beacon frame.
5065  *
5066  * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
5067  * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
5068  * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
5069  * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
5070  *
5071  * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
5072  *
5073  * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
5074  */
5075 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5076 					 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5077 					 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
5078 
5079 /**
5080  * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
5081  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5082  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5083  *
5084  * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
5085  *
5086  * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
5087  */
5088 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5089 						   struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
5090 {
5091 	return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
5092 }
5093 
5094 /**
5095  * ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn - request mac80211 to decrement the beacon countdown
5096  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5097  *
5098  * The beacon counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
5099  * This function is called implicitly when
5100  * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
5101  * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
5102  * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's beacon countdown.
5103  *
5104  * Return: new countdown value
5105  */
5106 u8 ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5107 
5108 /**
5109  * ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn - request mac80211 to set beacon countdown
5110  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5111  * @counter: the new value for the counter
5112  *
5113  * The beacon countdown can be changed by the device, this API should be
5114  * used by the device driver to update csa counter in mac80211.
5115  *
5116  * It should never be used together with ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(),
5117  * as it will cause a race condition around the counter value.
5118  */
5119 void ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 counter);
5120 
5121 /**
5122  * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
5123  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5124  *
5125  * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
5126  * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
5127  * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
5128  */
5129 void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5130 
5131 /**
5132  * ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete - find out if countdown reached 1
5133  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5134  *
5135  * This function returns whether the countdown reached zero.
5136  */
5137 bool ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5138 
5139 /**
5140  * ieee80211_color_change_finish - notify mac80211 about color change
5141  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5142  *
5143  * After a color change announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
5144  * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
5145  * notify mac80211 that the color can be changed
5146  */
5147 void ieee80211_color_change_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5148 
5149 /**
5150  * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
5151  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5152  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5153  *
5154  * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5155  * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
5156  *
5157  * Can only be called in AP mode.
5158  *
5159  * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
5160  */
5161 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5162 					struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5163 
5164 /**
5165  * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
5166  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5167  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5168  *
5169  * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
5170  * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
5171  * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
5172  *
5173  * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
5174  * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
5175  *
5176  * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
5177  */
5178 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5179 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5180 
5181 /**
5182  * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
5183  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5184  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5185  * @qos_ok: QoS NDP is acceptable to the caller, this should be set
5186  *	if at all possible
5187  *
5188  * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
5189  * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
5190  * BSSID and address is used.
5191  *
5192  * If @qos_ndp is set and the association is to an AP with QoS/WMM, the
5193  * returned packet will be QoS NDP.
5194  *
5195  * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
5196  * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
5197  *
5198  * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
5199  */
5200 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5201 				       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5202 				       bool qos_ok);
5203 
5204 /**
5205  * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
5206  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5207  * @src_addr: source MAC address
5208  * @ssid: SSID buffer
5209  * @ssid_len: length of SSID
5210  * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
5211  *
5212  * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5213  * hardware.
5214  *
5215  * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
5216  */
5217 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5218 				       const u8 *src_addr,
5219 				       const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
5220 				       size_t tailroom);
5221 
5222 /**
5223  * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
5224  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5225  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5226  * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
5227  * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
5228  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5229  * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
5230  *
5231  * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
5232  * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5233  * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
5234  * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
5235  */
5236 void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5237 		       const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
5238 		       const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
5239 		       struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
5240 
5241 /**
5242  * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
5243  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5244  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5245  * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
5246  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5247  *
5248  * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
5249  * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5250  * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
5251  *
5252  * Return: The duration.
5253  */
5254 __le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5255 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
5256 			      const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
5257 
5258 /**
5259  * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
5260  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5261  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5262  * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
5263  * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
5264  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5265  * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
5266  *
5267  * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
5268  * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5269  * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
5270  * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
5271  */
5272 void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5273 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5274 			     const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
5275 			     const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
5276 			     struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
5277 
5278 /**
5279  * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
5280  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5281  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5282  * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
5283  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5284  *
5285  * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
5286  * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5287  * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
5288  *
5289  * Return: The duration.
5290  */
5291 __le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5292 				    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5293 				    size_t frame_len,
5294 				    const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
5295 
5296 /**
5297  * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
5298  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5299  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5300  * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
5301  * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
5302  * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
5303  *
5304  * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
5305  * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
5306  *
5307  * Return: The duration.
5308  */
5309 __le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5310 					struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5311 					enum nl80211_band band,
5312 					size_t frame_len,
5313 					struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
5314 
5315 /**
5316  * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
5317  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5318  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5319  *
5320  * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
5321  * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
5322  * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
5323  * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
5324  * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
5325  *
5326  * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
5327  * frames are available.
5328  *
5329  * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
5330  * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
5331  * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
5332  * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
5333  * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
5334  * use common code for all beacons.
5335  */
5336 struct sk_buff *
5337 ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5338 
5339 /**
5340  * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
5341  *
5342  * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
5343  *
5344  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5345  * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
5346  * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5347  */
5348 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5349 			       u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
5350 
5351 /**
5352  * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
5353  *
5354  * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
5355  * from the given packet.
5356  *
5357  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5358  * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
5359  *	with this P1K
5360  * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5361  */
5362 static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5363 					  struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
5364 {
5365 	struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
5366 	const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
5367 	u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
5368 
5369 	ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
5370 }
5371 
5372 /**
5373  * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
5374  *
5375  * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
5376  * and transmitter address.
5377  *
5378  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5379  * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
5380  * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
5381  * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5382  */
5383 void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5384 			       const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
5385 
5386 /**
5387  * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
5388  *
5389  * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
5390  * in the packet.
5391  *
5392  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5393  * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
5394  *	encrypted with this key
5395  * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
5396  */
5397 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5398 			    struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
5399 
5400 /**
5401  * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos
5402  *
5403  * @pos: start of crypto header
5404  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5405  * @pn: PN to add
5406  *
5407  * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of
5408  * the packet payload)
5409  *
5410  * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should
5411  * point to the crypto header)
5412  */
5413 u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn);
5414 
5415 /**
5416  * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
5417  *
5418  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5419  * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5420  *	the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
5421  *	CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
5422  * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
5423  *
5424  * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
5425  * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
5426  * by the device and not by mac80211.
5427  *
5428  * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
5429  * can be done concurrently.
5430  */
5431 void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5432 			      int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
5433 
5434 /**
5435  * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
5436  *
5437  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5438  * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5439  *	the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
5440  *	CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
5441  * @seq: new sequence data
5442  *
5443  * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
5444  * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
5445  * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
5446  * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
5447  *
5448  * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
5449  * can be done concurrently.
5450  */
5451 void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5452 			      int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
5453 
5454 /**
5455  * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
5456  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5457  *
5458  * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
5459  * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
5460  * instead assumed to have been removed already.
5461  *
5462  * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
5463  * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
5464  */
5465 void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5466 
5467 /**
5468  * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
5469  * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
5470  * @keyconf: new key data
5471  *
5472  * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
5473  * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
5474  * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
5475  *
5476  * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
5477  * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
5478  * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
5479  * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
5480  *
5481  * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
5482  * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
5483  * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
5484  * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
5485  * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
5486  * of the reconfiguration.
5487  *
5488  * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
5489  * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
5490  *
5491  * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
5492  * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
5493  * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
5494  * the key that's being replaced.
5495  */
5496 struct ieee80211_key_conf *
5497 ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5498 			struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5499 
5500 /**
5501  * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
5502  * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
5503  * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
5504  * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
5505  * @gfp: allocation flags
5506  */
5507 void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
5508 				const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
5509 
5510 /**
5511  * ieee80211_key_mic_failure - increment MIC failure counter for the key
5512  *
5513  * Note: this is really only safe if no other RX function is called
5514  * at the same time.
5515  *
5516  * @keyconf: the key in question
5517  */
5518 void ieee80211_key_mic_failure(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5519 
5520 /**
5521  * ieee80211_key_replay - increment replay counter for the key
5522  *
5523  * Note: this is really only safe if no other RX function is called
5524  * at the same time.
5525  *
5526  * @keyconf: the key in question
5527  */
5528 void ieee80211_key_replay(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5529 
5530 /**
5531  * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
5532  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5533  * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5534  *
5535  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5536  */
5537 void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5538 
5539 /**
5540  * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
5541  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5542  * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5543  *
5544  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5545  */
5546 void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5547 
5548 /**
5549  * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
5550  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5551  * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5552  *
5553  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5554  *
5555  * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
5556  */
5557 
5558 int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5559 
5560 /**
5561  * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
5562  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5563  *
5564  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5565  */
5566 void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5567 
5568 /**
5569  * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
5570  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5571  *
5572  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5573  */
5574 void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5575 
5576 /**
5577  * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
5578  *
5579  * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
5580  * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
5581  * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
5582  * any context, including hardirq context.
5583  *
5584  * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
5585  * @info: information about the completed scan
5586  */
5587 void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5588 			      struct cfg80211_scan_info *info);
5589 
5590 /**
5591  * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
5592  *
5593  * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
5594  * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
5595  *
5596  * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5597  */
5598 void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5599 
5600 /**
5601  * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
5602  *
5603  * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
5604  * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
5605  * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
5606  * while associating, for instance.
5607  *
5608  * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5609  */
5610 void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5611 
5612 /**
5613  * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
5614  * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
5615  *	been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
5616  *	reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
5617  *	interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
5618  *	haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5619  * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
5620  *	interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5621  * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up).
5622  * @IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER: Skip any interfaces where SDATA
5623  *	is not in the driver.  This may fix crashes during firmware recovery
5624  *	for instance.
5625  */
5626 enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
5627 	IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL	= 0,
5628 	IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL	= BIT(0),
5629 	IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE	= BIT(1),
5630 	IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER	= BIT(2),
5631 };
5632 
5633 /**
5634  * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces
5635  *
5636  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5637  * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as
5638  * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep.
5639  * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5640  *
5641  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5642  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5643  * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5644  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5645  */
5646 void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5647 				  void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5648 						   struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5649 				  void *data);
5650 
5651 /**
5652  * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
5653  *
5654  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5655  * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5656  * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
5657  * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
5658  * be used.
5659  * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5660  *
5661  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5662  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5663  * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5664  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5665  */
5666 static inline void
5667 ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5668 				    void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5669 						     struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5670 				    void *data)
5671 {
5672 	ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw,
5673 				     iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE,
5674 				     iterator, data);
5675 }
5676 
5677 /**
5678  * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
5679  *
5680  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5681  * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5682  * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5683  * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
5684  * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5685  *
5686  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5687  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5688  * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5689  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5690  */
5691 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5692 						u32 iter_flags,
5693 						void (*iterator)(void *data,
5694 						    u8 *mac,
5695 						    struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5696 						void *data);
5697 
5698 /**
5699  * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_mtx - iterate active interfaces
5700  *
5701  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5702  * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5703  * This version can only be used while holding the wiphy mutex.
5704  * The driver must not call this with a lock held that it can also take in
5705  * response to callbacks from mac80211, and it must not call this within
5706  * callbacks made by mac80211 - both would result in deadlocks.
5707  *
5708  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5709  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5710  * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5711  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5712  */
5713 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_mtx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5714 					     u32 iter_flags,
5715 					     void (*iterator)(void *data,
5716 						u8 *mac,
5717 						struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5718 					     void *data);
5719 
5720 /**
5721  * ieee80211_iterate_stations - iterate stations
5722  *
5723  * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
5724  * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
5725  * function for them.
5726  * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
5727  * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic can be used.
5728  *
5729  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5730  * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5731  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5732  */
5733 void ieee80211_iterate_stations(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5734 				void (*iterator)(void *data,
5735 						 struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
5736 				void *data);
5737 
5738 /**
5739  * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
5740  *
5741  * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
5742  * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
5743  * function for them.
5744  * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5745  *
5746  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5747  * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5748  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5749  */
5750 void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5751 				       void (*iterator)(void *data,
5752 						struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
5753 				       void *data);
5754 /**
5755  * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5756  *
5757  * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
5758  * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
5759  *
5760  * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5761  * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
5762  */
5763 void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
5764 
5765 /**
5766  * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5767  *
5768  * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
5769  * workqueue.
5770  *
5771  * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5772  * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
5773  * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
5774  */
5775 void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5776 				  struct delayed_work *dwork,
5777 				  unsigned long delay);
5778 
5779 /**
5780  * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
5781  * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
5782  * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5783  * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
5784  *
5785  * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
5786  *
5787  * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5788  * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5789  * will be managed by the mac80211.
5790  */
5791 int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
5792 				  u16 timeout);
5793 
5794 /**
5795  * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
5796  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5797  * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5798  * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5799  *
5800  * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
5801  * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
5802  * from any context.
5803  */
5804 void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
5805 				      u16 tid);
5806 
5807 /**
5808  * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
5809  * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
5810  * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
5811  *
5812  * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
5813  *
5814  * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5815  * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5816  * will be managed by the mac80211.
5817  */
5818 int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
5819 
5820 /**
5821  * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
5822  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5823  * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5824  * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
5825  *
5826  * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
5827  * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
5828  * can be called from any context.
5829  */
5830 void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
5831 				     u16 tid);
5832 
5833 /**
5834  * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
5835  *
5836  * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
5837  * @addr: station's address
5838  *
5839  * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5840  *
5841  * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
5842  * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5843  */
5844 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5845 					 const u8 *addr);
5846 
5847 /**
5848  * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
5849  *
5850  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5851  * @addr: remote station's address
5852  * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
5853  *
5854  * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5855  *
5856  * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
5857  * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5858  *
5859  * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
5860  *      the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
5861  *      We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
5862  *      logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
5863  *      BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
5864  *      In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
5865  *      is not reliable.
5866  *
5867  * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
5868  */
5869 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5870 					       const u8 *addr,
5871 					       const u8 *localaddr);
5872 
5873 /**
5874  * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
5875  * @hw: the hardware
5876  * @pubsta: the station
5877  * @block: whether to block or unblock
5878  *
5879  * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
5880  * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
5881  * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
5882  * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
5883  * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
5884  *
5885  * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
5886  * manner.
5887  *
5888  * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
5889  * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
5890  * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
5891  * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
5892  * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
5893  * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
5894  * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
5895  * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
5896  * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
5897  * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
5898  * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
5899  * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
5900  * woke up while blocked or not.
5901  */
5902 void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5903 			       struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
5904 
5905 /**
5906  * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
5907  * @pubsta: the station
5908  *
5909  * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
5910  * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
5911  * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
5912  * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
5913  *
5914  * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
5915  * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
5916  * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
5917  * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
5918  *
5919  * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
5920  *     driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
5921  *     you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
5922  *     and restore the _irqsafe version!
5923  */
5924 void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
5925 
5926 /**
5927  * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP
5928  * @pubsta: the station
5929  * @tid: the tid of the NDP
5930  *
5931  * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close
5932  * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when
5933  * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window.
5934  * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a
5935  * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the
5936  * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to
5937  * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any
5938  * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong.
5939  * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame
5940  * will be sent despite the station being in power-save.
5941  * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames().
5942  * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver
5943  * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call
5944  * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent.
5945  */
5946 void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid);
5947 
5948 /**
5949  * ieee80211_sta_register_airtime - register airtime usage for a sta/tid
5950  *
5951  * Register airtime usage for a given sta on a given tid. The driver must call
5952  * this function to notify mac80211 that a station used a certain amount of
5953  * airtime. This information will be used by the TXQ scheduler to schedule
5954  * stations in a way that ensures airtime fairness.
5955  *
5956  * The reported airtime should as a minimum include all time that is spent
5957  * transmitting to the remote station, including overhead and padding, but not
5958  * including time spent waiting for a TXOP. If the time is not reported by the
5959  * hardware it can in some cases be calculated from the rate and known frame
5960  * composition. When possible, the time should include any failed transmission
5961  * attempts.
5962  *
5963  * The driver can either call this function synchronously for every packet or
5964  * aggregate, or asynchronously as airtime usage information becomes available.
5965  * TX and RX airtime can be reported together, or separately by setting one of
5966  * them to 0.
5967  *
5968  * @pubsta: the station
5969  * @tid: the TID to register airtime for
5970  * @tx_airtime: airtime used during TX (in usec)
5971  * @rx_airtime: airtime used during RX (in usec)
5972  */
5973 void ieee80211_sta_register_airtime(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
5974 				    u32 tx_airtime, u32 rx_airtime);
5975 
5976 /**
5977  * ieee80211_txq_airtime_check - check if a txq can send frame to device
5978  *
5979  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5980  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
5981  *
5982  * Return true if the AQL's airtime limit has not been reached and the txq can
5983  * continue to send more packets to the device. Otherwise return false.
5984  */
5985 bool
5986 ieee80211_txq_airtime_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
5987 
5988 /**
5989  * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
5990  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5991  * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5992  * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5993  * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5994  *
5995  * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5996  * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5997  * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
5998  * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
5999  * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
6000  * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
6001  *
6002  * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
6003  * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
6004  * set_key callback.
6005  */
6006 void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6007 			 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6008 			 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6009 				      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6010 				      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6011 				      struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
6012 				      void *data),
6013 			 void *iter_data);
6014 
6015 /**
6016  * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device
6017  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6018  * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
6019  * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
6020  * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
6021  *
6022  * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
6023  * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
6024  * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station
6025  * in removal process will be skipped.
6026  *
6027  * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section,
6028  * and thus iter must be atomic.
6029  */
6030 void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6031 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6032 			     void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6033 					  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6034 					  struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6035 					  struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
6036 					  void *data),
6037 			     void *iter_data);
6038 
6039 /**
6040  * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
6041  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
6042  * @iter: iterator function
6043  * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
6044  *
6045  * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
6046  * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
6047  * places while calling into the driver.
6048  *
6049  * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
6050  * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
6051  * removed.
6052  *
6053  * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
6054  * before the restart are considered already present so will be
6055  * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
6056  * or not.
6057  */
6058 void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
6059 	struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6060 	void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6061 		     struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
6062 		     void *data),
6063 	void *iter_data);
6064 
6065 /**
6066  * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
6067  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
6068  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6069  *
6070  * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
6071  * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
6072  * information. This function must only be called from within the
6073  * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
6074  * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
6075  * %NULL.
6076  *
6077  * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
6078  */
6079 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6080 					  struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6081 
6082 /**
6083  * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
6084  *
6085  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6086  *
6087  * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
6088  * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
6089  * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
6090  */
6091 void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6092 
6093 /**
6094  * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
6095  *
6096  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6097  *
6098  * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
6099  * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
6100  * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
6101  * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
6102  * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
6103  *
6104  * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
6105  * without connection recovery attempts.
6106  */
6107 void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6108 
6109 /**
6110  * ieee80211_disconnect - request disconnection
6111  *
6112  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6113  * @reconnect: immediate reconnect is desired
6114  *
6115  * Request disconnection from the current network and, if enabled, send a
6116  * hint to the higher layers that immediate reconnect is desired.
6117  */
6118 void ieee80211_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool reconnect);
6119 
6120 /**
6121  * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
6122  *
6123  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6124  *
6125  * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
6126  * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
6127  * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
6128  * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
6129  * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
6130  *
6131  * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
6132  * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
6133  * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
6134  * disconnect normally later.
6135  *
6136  * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
6137  * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
6138  * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
6139  * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
6140  */
6141 void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6142 
6143 /**
6144  * ieee80211_hw_restart_disconnect - disconnect from AP after
6145  * hardware restart
6146  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6147  *
6148  * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after
6149  * hardware restart.
6150  */
6151 void ieee80211_hw_restart_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6152 
6153 /**
6154  * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
6155  *	rssi threshold triggered
6156  *
6157  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6158  * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
6159  * @rssi_level: new RSSI level value or 0 if not available
6160  * @gfp: context flags
6161  *
6162  * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
6163  * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
6164  * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
6165  */
6166 void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6167 			       enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
6168 			       s32 rssi_level,
6169 			       gfp_t gfp);
6170 
6171 /**
6172  * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss
6173  *
6174  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6175  * @gfp: context flags
6176  */
6177 void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp);
6178 
6179 /**
6180  * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
6181  *
6182  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6183  */
6184 void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6185 
6186 /**
6187  * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
6188  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6189  * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
6190  *
6191  * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
6192  * and wake up the suspended queues.
6193  */
6194 void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
6195 
6196 /**
6197  * ieee80211_channel_switch_disconnect - disconnect due to channel switch error
6198  * @vif &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6199  * @block_tx: if %true, do not send deauth frame.
6200  *
6201  * Instruct mac80211 to disconnect due to a channel switch error. The channel
6202  * switch can request to block the tx and so, we need to make sure we do not send
6203  * a deauth frame in this case.
6204  */
6205 void ieee80211_channel_switch_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6206 					 bool block_tx);
6207 
6208 /**
6209  * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
6210  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6211  * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
6212  *
6213  * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
6214  * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
6215  * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
6216  */
6217 void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6218 			    enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
6219 
6220 /**
6221  * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
6222  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6223  */
6224 void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6225 
6226 /**
6227  * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
6228  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6229  */
6230 void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6231 
6232 /**
6233  * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
6234  *
6235  * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
6236  * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
6237  * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
6238  * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
6239  * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
6240  * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
6241  *
6242  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6243  * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
6244  * @addr: & to bssid mac address
6245  */
6246 void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
6247 				  const u8 *addr);
6248 
6249 /**
6250  * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered
6251  * @pubsta: station struct
6252  * @tid: the session's TID
6253  * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are
6254  *	assumed to be out of the window after the call
6255  * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc.
6256  * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware
6257  *
6258  * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and
6259  * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it
6260  * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released
6261  * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.)
6262  */
6263 void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
6264 					  u16 ssn, u64 filtered,
6265 					  u16 received_mpdus);
6266 
6267 /**
6268  * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
6269  *
6270  * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
6271  * buffer.
6272  *
6273  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6274  * @ra: the peer's destination address
6275  * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
6276  * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
6277  */
6278 void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
6279 
6280 /**
6281  * ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl - helper to queue an RX BA work
6282  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6283  * @addr: station mac address
6284  * @tid: the rx tid
6285  */
6286 void ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *addr,
6287 				 unsigned int tid);
6288 
6289 /**
6290  * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
6291  *
6292  * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
6293  * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
6294  * reordering.
6295  *
6296  * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
6297  * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
6298  *
6299  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6300  * @addr: station mac address
6301  * @tid: the rx tid
6302  */
6303 static inline void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6304 						      const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
6305 {
6306 	if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
6307 		return;
6308 	ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid);
6309 }
6310 
6311 /**
6312  * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
6313  *
6314  * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
6315  * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
6316  * reordering.
6317  *
6318  * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
6319  * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
6320  *
6321  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6322  * @addr: station mac address
6323  * @tid: the rx tid
6324  */
6325 static inline void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6326 						     const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
6327 {
6328 	if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
6329 		return;
6330 	ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid + IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS);
6331 }
6332 
6333 /**
6334  * ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired - stop a Rx BA session due to timeout
6335  *
6336  * Some device drivers do not offload AddBa/DelBa negotiation, but handle rx
6337  * buffer reording internally, and therefore also handle the session timer.
6338  *
6339  * Trigger the timeout flow, which sends a DelBa.
6340  *
6341  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6342  * @addr: station mac address
6343  * @tid: the rx tid
6344  */
6345 void ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6346 				   const u8 *addr, unsigned int tid);
6347 
6348 /* Rate control API */
6349 
6350 /**
6351  * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
6352  *
6353  * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
6354  * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
6355  * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
6356  * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
6357  *	to be filled in
6358  * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
6359  *	which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
6360  *	used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
6361  * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
6362  *	RTS threshold
6363  * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
6364  *	if the selected rate supports it
6365  * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
6366  * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
6367  * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
6368  */
6369 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
6370 	struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
6371 	struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
6372 	struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
6373 	struct sk_buff *skb;
6374 	struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
6375 	bool rts, short_preamble;
6376 	u32 rate_idx_mask;
6377 	u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
6378 	bool bss;
6379 };
6380 
6381 /**
6382  * enum rate_control_capabilities - rate control capabilities
6383  */
6384 enum rate_control_capabilities {
6385 	/**
6386 	 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW:
6387 	 * Support for extended NSS BW support (dot11VHTExtendedNSSCapable)
6388 	 * Note that this is only looked at if the minimum number of chains
6389 	 * that the AP uses is < the number of TX chains the hardware has,
6390 	 * otherwise the NSS difference doesn't bother us.
6391 	 */
6392 	RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW = BIT(0),
6393 	/**
6394 	 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_AMPDU_TRIGGER:
6395 	 * mac80211 should start A-MPDU sessions on tx
6396 	 */
6397 	RATE_CTRL_CAPA_AMPDU_TRIGGER = BIT(1),
6398 };
6399 
6400 struct rate_control_ops {
6401 	unsigned long capa;
6402 	const char *name;
6403 	void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6404 	void (*add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, void *priv,
6405 			    struct dentry *debugfsdir);
6406 	void (*free)(void *priv);
6407 
6408 	void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
6409 	void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6410 			  struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
6411 			  struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
6412 	void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6413 			    struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
6414 			    struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6415 			    u32 changed);
6416 	void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6417 			 void *priv_sta);
6418 
6419 	void (*tx_status_ext)(void *priv,
6420 			      struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6421 			      void *priv_sta, struct ieee80211_tx_status *st);
6422 	void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6423 			  struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6424 			  struct sk_buff *skb);
6425 	void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6426 			 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
6427 
6428 	void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
6429 				struct dentry *dir);
6430 
6431 	u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
6432 };
6433 
6434 static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6435 				 enum nl80211_band band,
6436 				 int index)
6437 {
6438 	return (sta == NULL || sta->deflink.supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
6439 }
6440 
6441 static inline s8
6442 rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6443 		  struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
6444 {
6445 	int i;
6446 
6447 	for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
6448 		if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
6449 			return i;
6450 
6451 	/* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
6452 	WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
6453 
6454 	/* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
6455 	return 0;
6456 }
6457 
6458 static inline
6459 bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6460 			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
6461 {
6462 	unsigned int i;
6463 
6464 	for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
6465 		if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
6466 			return true;
6467 	return false;
6468 }
6469 
6470 /**
6471  * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
6472  *
6473  * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
6474  * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
6475  * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
6476  * the most recent rate control module decision.
6477  *
6478  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6479  * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
6480  * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
6481  */
6482 int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6483 			   struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
6484 			   struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
6485 
6486 int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6487 void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6488 
6489 static inline bool
6490 conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6491 {
6492 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
6493 }
6494 
6495 static inline bool
6496 conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6497 {
6498 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
6499 	       conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
6500 }
6501 
6502 static inline bool
6503 conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6504 {
6505 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
6506 	       conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
6507 }
6508 
6509 static inline bool
6510 conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6511 {
6512 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
6513 }
6514 
6515 static inline bool
6516 conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6517 {
6518 	return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
6519 		(conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
6520 		(conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
6521 }
6522 
6523 static inline enum nl80211_iftype
6524 ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
6525 {
6526 	if (p2p) {
6527 		switch (type) {
6528 		case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
6529 			return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
6530 		case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
6531 			return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
6532 		default:
6533 			break;
6534 		}
6535 	}
6536 	return type;
6537 }
6538 
6539 static inline enum nl80211_iftype
6540 ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
6541 {
6542 	return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
6543 }
6544 
6545 /**
6546  * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data
6547  *
6548  * @vif: the specified virtual interface
6549  * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
6550  * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
6551  *
6552  * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and
6553  * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the
6554  * matching GroupId management frame.
6555  * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path.
6556  */
6557 void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6558 				const u8 *membership, const u8 *position);
6559 
6560 void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6561 				   int rssi_min_thold,
6562 				   int rssi_max_thold);
6563 
6564 void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6565 
6566 /**
6567  * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
6568  *
6569  * @vif: the specified virtual interface
6570  *
6571  * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
6572  *
6573  * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
6574  * applicable.
6575  */
6576 int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6577 
6578 /**
6579  * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
6580  * @vif: virtual interface
6581  * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
6582  * @gfp: allocation flags
6583  *
6584  * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
6585  */
6586 void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6587 				    struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
6588 				    gfp_t gfp);
6589 
6590 /**
6591  * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
6592  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6593  * @vif: virtual interface
6594  * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
6595  * @band: the band to transmit on
6596  * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
6597  *
6598  * Note: must be called under RCU lock
6599  */
6600 bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6601 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
6602 			      int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
6603 
6604 /**
6605  * ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap - Sanity-check and parse the radiotap header
6606  *				 of injected frames.
6607  *
6608  * To accurately parse and take into account rate and retransmission fields,
6609  * you must initialize the chandef field in the ieee80211_tx_info structure
6610  * of the skb before calling this function.
6611  *
6612  * @skb: packet injected by userspace
6613  * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
6614  */
6615 bool ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap(struct sk_buff *skb,
6616 				 struct net_device *dev);
6617 
6618 /**
6619  * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
6620  *
6621  * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
6622  * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
6623  *
6624  * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
6625  *
6626  * private:
6627  *
6628  * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
6629  * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
6630  */
6631 struct ieee80211_noa_data {
6632 	u32 next_tsf;
6633 	bool has_next_tsf;
6634 
6635 	u8 absent;
6636 
6637 	u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6638 	struct {
6639 		u32 start;
6640 		u32 duration;
6641 		u32 interval;
6642 	} desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6643 };
6644 
6645 /**
6646  * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
6647  *
6648  * @attr: P2P NoA IE
6649  * @data: NoA tracking data
6650  * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6651  *
6652  * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
6653  */
6654 int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
6655 			    struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6656 
6657 /**
6658  * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
6659  *
6660  * @data: NoA tracking data
6661  * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6662  */
6663 void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6664 
6665 /**
6666  * ieee80211_tdls_oper_request - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
6667  * @vif: virtual interface
6668  * @peer: the peer's destination address
6669  * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
6670  * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
6671  * @gfp: allocation flags
6672  *
6673  * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
6674  */
6675 void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
6676 				 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
6677 				 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
6678 
6679 /**
6680  * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
6681  *
6682  * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
6683  * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
6684  * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
6685  * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
6686  * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
6687  * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
6688  *
6689  * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
6690  * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
6691  * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6692  *
6693  * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
6694  * @tid: the TID to reserve
6695  *
6696  * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
6697  */
6698 int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6699 
6700 /**
6701  * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
6702  *
6703  * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
6704  * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
6705  * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
6706  *
6707  * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
6708  * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
6709  * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6710  *
6711  * @sta: the station
6712  * @tid: the TID to unreserve
6713  */
6714 void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6715 
6716 /**
6717  * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
6718  *
6719  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6720  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
6721  *	ieee80211_next_txq()
6722  *
6723  * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available.
6724  *
6725  * Note that this must be called in an rcu_read_lock() critical section,
6726  * which can only be released after the SKB was handled. Some pointers in
6727  * skb->cb, e.g. the key pointer, are protected by RCU and thus the
6728  * critical section must persist not just for the duration of this call
6729  * but for the duration of the frame handling.
6730  * However, also note that while in the wake_tx_queue() method,
6731  * rcu_read_lock() is already held.
6732  *
6733  * softirqs must also be disabled when this function is called.
6734  * In process context, use ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni() instead.
6735  */
6736 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6737 				     struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6738 
6739 /**
6740  * ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
6741  * (in process context)
6742  *
6743  * Like ieee80211_tx_dequeue() but can be called in process context
6744  * (internally disables bottom halves).
6745  *
6746  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6747  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
6748  *	ieee80211_next_txq()
6749  */
6750 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6751 						      struct ieee80211_txq *txq)
6752 {
6753 	struct sk_buff *skb;
6754 
6755 	local_bh_disable();
6756 	skb = ieee80211_tx_dequeue(hw, txq);
6757 	local_bh_enable();
6758 
6759 	return skb;
6760 }
6761 
6762 /**
6763  * ieee80211_next_txq - get next tx queue to pull packets from
6764  *
6765  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6766  * @ac: AC number to return packets from.
6767  *
6768  * Returns the next txq if successful, %NULL if no queue is eligible. If a txq
6769  * is returned, it should be returned with ieee80211_return_txq() after the
6770  * driver has finished scheduling it.
6771  */
6772 struct ieee80211_txq *ieee80211_next_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
6773 
6774 /**
6775  * ieee80211_txq_schedule_start - start new scheduling round for TXQs
6776  *
6777  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6778  * @ac: AC number to acquire locks for
6779  *
6780  * Should be called before ieee80211_next_txq() or ieee80211_return_txq().
6781  * The driver must not call multiple TXQ scheduling rounds concurrently.
6782  */
6783 void ieee80211_txq_schedule_start(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
6784 
6785 /* (deprecated) */
6786 static inline void ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac)
6787 {
6788 }
6789 
6790 /**
6791  * ieee80211_schedule_txq - schedule a TXQ for transmission
6792  *
6793  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6794  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6795  *
6796  * Schedules a TXQ for transmission if it is not already scheduled,
6797  * even if mac80211 does not have any packets buffered.
6798  *
6799  * The driver may call this function if it has buffered packets for
6800  * this TXQ internally.
6801  */
6802 void ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6803 
6804 /**
6805  * ieee80211_return_txq - return a TXQ previously acquired by ieee80211_next_txq()
6806  *
6807  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6808  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6809  * @force: schedule txq even if mac80211 does not have any buffered packets.
6810  *
6811  * The driver may set force=true if it has buffered packets for this TXQ
6812  * internally.
6813  */
6814 void ieee80211_return_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
6815 			  bool force);
6816 
6817 /**
6818  * ieee80211_txq_may_transmit - check whether TXQ is allowed to transmit
6819  *
6820  * This function is used to check whether given txq is allowed to transmit by
6821  * the airtime scheduler, and can be used by drivers to access the airtime
6822  * fairness accounting without going using the scheduling order enfored by
6823  * next_txq().
6824  *
6825  * Returns %true if the airtime scheduler thinks the TXQ should be allowed to
6826  * transmit, and %false if it should be throttled. This function can also have
6827  * the side effect of rotating the TXQ in the scheduler rotation, which will
6828  * eventually bring the deficit to positive and allow the station to transmit
6829  * again.
6830  *
6831  * The API ieee80211_txq_may_transmit() also ensures that TXQ list will be
6832  * aligned against driver's own round-robin scheduler list. i.e it rotates
6833  * the TXQ list till it makes the requested node becomes the first entry
6834  * in TXQ list. Thus both the TXQ list and driver's list are in sync. If this
6835  * function returns %true, the driver is expected to schedule packets
6836  * for transmission, and then return the TXQ through ieee80211_return_txq().
6837  *
6838  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6839  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6840  */
6841 bool ieee80211_txq_may_transmit(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6842 				struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6843 
6844 /**
6845  * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq
6846  *
6847  * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e.
6848  * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up
6849  * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa.
6850  *
6851  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6852  * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count
6853  * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count
6854  */
6855 void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
6856 			     unsigned long *frame_cnt,
6857 			     unsigned long *byte_cnt);
6858 
6859 /**
6860  * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination.
6861  *
6862  * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination.
6863  * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
6864  *
6865  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6866  * @inst_id: the local instance id
6867  * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*)
6868  * @gfp: allocation flags
6869  */
6870 void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6871 				   u8 inst_id,
6872 				   enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason,
6873 				   gfp_t gfp);
6874 
6875 /**
6876  * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event.
6877  *
6878  * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The
6879  * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211.
6880  * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
6881  *
6882  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6883  * @match: match event information
6884  * @gfp: allocation flags
6885  */
6886 void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6887 			      struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match,
6888 			      gfp_t gfp);
6889 
6890 /**
6891  * ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for RX.
6892  *
6893  * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the
6894  * rate information in the RX status struct and the frame length.
6895  *
6896  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6897  * @status: &struct ieee80211_rx_status containing the transmission rate
6898  *          information.
6899  * @len: frame length in bytes
6900  */
6901 u32 ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6902 			      struct ieee80211_rx_status *status,
6903 			      int len);
6904 
6905 /**
6906  * ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for TX.
6907  *
6908  * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the
6909  * rate information in the TX info struct and the frame length.
6910  *
6911  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6912  * @info: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
6913  * @len: frame length in bytes
6914  */
6915 u32 ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6916 			      struct ieee80211_tx_info *info,
6917 			      int len);
6918 /**
6919  * ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap - enable hardware encapsulation offloading.
6920  *
6921  * This function is used to notify mac80211 that a vif can be passed raw 802.3
6922  * frames. The driver needs to then handle the 802.11 encapsulation inside the
6923  * hardware or firmware.
6924  *
6925  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6926  * @enable: indicate if the feature should be turned on or off
6927  */
6928 bool ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool enable);
6929 
6930 /**
6931  * ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl - Get FILS discovery template.
6932  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
6933  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6934  *
6935  * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
6936  *
6937  * Return: FILS discovery template. %NULL on error.
6938  */
6939 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6940 						  struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6941 
6942 /**
6943  * ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl - Get unsolicited broadcast
6944  *	probe response template.
6945  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
6946  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6947  *
6948  * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
6949  *
6950  * Return: Unsolicited broadcast probe response template. %NULL on error.
6951  */
6952 struct sk_buff *
6953 ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6954 					  struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6955 
6956 /**
6957  * ieeee80211_obss_color_collision_notify - notify userland about a BSS color
6958  * collision.
6959  *
6960  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6961  * @color_bitmap: a 64 bit bitmap representing the colors that the local BSS is
6962  *	aware of.
6963  */
6964 void
6965 ieeee80211_obss_color_collision_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6966 				       u64 color_bitmap);
6967 
6968 /**
6969  * ieee80211_is_tx_data - check if frame is a data frame
6970  *
6971  * The function is used to check if a frame is a data frame. Frames with
6972  * hardware encapsulation enabled are data frames.
6973  *
6974  * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
6975  */
6976 static inline bool ieee80211_is_tx_data(struct sk_buff *skb)
6977 {
6978 	struct ieee80211_tx_info *info = IEEE80211_SKB_CB(skb);
6979 	struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (void *) skb->data;
6980 
6981 	return info->flags & IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP ||
6982 	       ieee80211_is_data(hdr->frame_control);
6983 }
6984 
6985 #endif /* MAC80211_H */
6986